1706 - BF HOTEL - Specs - Structural

BF HOTEL
Makkah, Saudi Arabia
PROJECT # 1706
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Civil/ Structural Works)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
STRUCTURAL/ CIVIL WORKS
SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING
SECTION 02260 – EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
SECTION 02300 – EARTHWORK
SECTION 02361 – TERMITE CONTROL
SECTION 03000 – CONCRETE WORK
SECTION 03331 – CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
SECTION 03490 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
SECTION 03400 – PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURE
SECTION 04810 – UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 05120 – STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 07135 – EPDM WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07210 – BUILDING INSULATION
SECTION 07920 – JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS
SECTION 16452 – EARTHING

PROJECT: 1706 – BF HOTEL
LOCATION: Makkah, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
SUBJECT: SECTION 02230- SITE CLEARING
SECTION 02230
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Clearing and grubbing.
2. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
3. Removing above-and below-grade site improvements.
4. Disconnecting and capping or sealing site utilities.
5. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.
1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Materials cleared on site shall become contractor's property and shall be removed from project site,
except for stripped topsoil or other materials on site that are clearly indicated to remain the owner's
property.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walkways, and other adjacent facilities that
are occupied or are used during site clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from the owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if it is required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
A. Utility Locator Service: Before commencing on site clearance notify a utility locator service to identify
the location of the utilities in and around the site.
B. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary measures to control erosion and
sedimentation are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2
Section "Earthwork."
1. When satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site, obtain approved soil materials from
off-site
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING 1/3

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B. Protect existing site improvements from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged site improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to the owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge
of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and as required and directed by the architect on site.
B. Inspect, maintain and repair erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until
permanent vegetation has been established.
C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and stabilize and restore areas disturbed during removal.
3.3 UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without architect's written permission.
C. Notify the architect and authorities if it is proposed to remove any of the underground utilities.
3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Fill all depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations on site with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavations or earthworks are indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 200 mm, and compact
each layer to a density equal to the adjacent original ground.
3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depth encountered on site in a manner that intermingling with underlying
subsoil or other waste materials is prevented.
C. Stockpile stripped topsoil materials away from the edge of excavations without intermixing it with
subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate
new construction.
3.7 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and
waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose them off site and off the owner's
property.
END OF SECTION 02230

SUBJECT: SECTION 02260- EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
SECTION 02260
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes temporary excavation support, dewatering and protection systems.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection systems capable of
supporting excavation sidewalls as well as resisting soil and hydrostatic pressures and superimposed
loads including construction loads.
1. For this purpose, provide professional engineering services needed by a qualified professional
engineer to assume engineering responsibility and provide a comprehensive engineering
analysis including preparation of calculations and shop drawings for the works.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Engineering calculations and shop drawings for Information prepared by or under the supervision of a
qualified professional engineer for excavation support and protection systems.
1. Include engineering calculations and shop drawings signed and sealed by a qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Survey existing adjacent structures and improvements, by employing a qualified professional engineer
or a land surveyor to establish and record exactly existing elevations at fixed points to act as
benchmarks. Clearly identify these benchmarks.
1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems and during excavation process
regularly resurvey the identified benchmarks and maintain an accurate log of surveyed
elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify
the architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage in
adjacent existing structures is evident.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials suitable to the existing site conditions, but not limited to the following.
1. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M.
2. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with
continuous interlocks.
3. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, with a compressive strength as required for its application.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 02260 – EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 1/2
SUBJECT: SECTION 02260- EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
4. Pre-cast Concrete Piling.
Other systems and materials proposed by contractor are subject to engineer and the owner approval.
B. System Description
1. Prior to commencing any form of excavation provide method statements and system description
suitable for the existing condition on site for approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from any damage
caused by lateral movement, undermining, settlement, washout and other hazards that could develop
during installation and operation of the excavation support and its protection system.
B. Install excavation and shoring supports and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with
roads, streets, walkways, and other existing adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Monitor excavation and shoring support and protection systems continuously during excavation
progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other
evidence of movement to ensure that shoring and support and protection systems are and remain
stable.
D. Promptly repair damages to the existing adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and
protection systems.
3.2 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to
support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing
underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.
1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches (1200
mm) below overlying construction and abandon remainder.
2. Repair or replace, as approved by the architect adjacent work damaged or displaced by
removing excavation support and protection systems.
3. Dewatering and perimeter drainage system to prevent any hydrostatic pressure around the
walls.
4. Dewatering shall continue till full stabilization and structural weight is achieved.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 02260 – EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 2/2
SUBJECT: SECTION 02300- EARTHWORK
SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Preparing sub-grade.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support
sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above sub-grade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below sub-grade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions as directed by the architect. Authorized additional excavation and
replacement material will be paid for according to contract provisions.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below sub-grade elevations or beyond indicated lines
and dimensions without direction by the architect. Making good of the unauthorized excavation,
as well as remedial work directed by the architect, shall be done without additional
compensation.
C. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
D. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
E. Sub base Course: Course placed between the sub-grade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the sub-grade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement
concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
F. Sub-grade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below sub base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
G. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services
within buildings.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the owner or others unless
permitted in writing by the architect and then only after arranging providing temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 02300 – EARTHWORK 1/5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials, excavated earth materials shall not be used as backfilling.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, free of
rock or gravel larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D 2487.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm)
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
E. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve
and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking
and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Preparation of sub grade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to sub grade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions. No changes in the contract sum or the contract time will be authorized
for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicate elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by
hand to final grade just before placing protection layers and concrete. Trim bottoms to required
lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
B. Excavation of unclassified materials.

1. Excavate unclassified materials such as rocks in accordance with the approved standard and
as per local authority requirements.
2. Obtain approval of system and methods from the architect prior to start of excavation.
3. Obtain Local Authority approval and permit where blasting and other system involving
explosives will be utilized.
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and sub
grades.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of
pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit or as indicated on drawings.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape sub grade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of
pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove sharp objects and projecting stones or
anything forming a hard bearing point along trench sub grade.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other
unyielding bearing material, 4 inches (100 mm) deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.
3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill,
with 28-day compressive strength of (20 MPa as a minimum), must be used and it shall be at the cost
of contractor, i.e. it shall not be paid for.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility services as directed by the
architect.
3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpiles borrow soil materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials without intermixing. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain their surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees, if any.
3.8 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on sub grades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course
to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies
of conduits.
C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil, fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)."
D. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches
(750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or
conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway sub-
base.
E. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides
and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping
or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing to ensure there is no damage.
F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final sub grade elevation.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches
(150 mm) below sub grade under pavements and slabs.
3.9 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal to ensure fill
material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
3.10 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate sub grade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or
ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
3.11 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose
depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and re-compact top 12 inches
(300 mm) of existing sub grade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and re-compact top 6 inches (150 mm) below sub grade and compact
each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and re-compact top 6 inches (150 mm) below sub grade
and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 90 percent.
3.12 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
B. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish sub grade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with
a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Footing Sub grade: At footing sub grades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to
verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing sub grades
may be based on a visual comparison of sub grade with tested sub grade when approved by the
architect.
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specify tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces
become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction
operations or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill
with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash,
and debris, and legally dispose of it off site and off the owner's property.

SUBJECT: SECTION 02361- TERMITE CONTROL
SECTION 02361
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Soil treatment with termiticide.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label.
B. Product certificates.
C. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:
1. Date and time of application.

2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that
termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of
subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty
period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months continuing service

including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a
standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for
agreement period; and terms for future renewal options.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION - 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 02361 – TERMITE CONTROL 1/3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. DURSBAN 4tc
2. TRAP
3. TERMINIX
4. or an approved equivalent
2.2 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required
for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each
specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood
debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and
around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted
areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs
if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.
3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required
for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide,
according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal
and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction.
Distribute treatment evenly.
1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab construction, including

footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before
concrete footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls,
along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit
penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; also along
the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.
3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent
areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall
treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.
4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.
5. Other locations as directed by the architect.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-
supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.
Post warning signs.
D. Re-apply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or
other construction activities following application.
SUBJECT: SECTION 03000- CONCRETE WORK
SECTION 03000
CONCRETE WORK
CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
APPLICABLE TESTS AND CODES
TESTING AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
METHOD STATEMENT
PART 2 - MATERIALS
CEMENT
AGGREGATES
FINE AGGREGATES
COARSE AGGREGATES
WATER
ADMIXTURES
SHOTCRETE MATERIALS
CYCLOPEAN CONCRETE MATERIALS
REINFORCING STEEL
REBAR ANCHORING CEMENT GROUT
DRY MORTAR AND NON SHRINK GROUT
HOLLOW CORES PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED RIBS
PVC FLEXIBLE WATER STOP
NEOPRENE PADS/STRIPS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
CLASSES OF CONCRETE
PROPORTIONS
CONCRETE COMPRESSION AND SLUMP TESTS
MIXING OF CONCRETE
HANDLING AND PLACING CONCRETE
REINFORCEMENT BARS
CURING AND PROTECTION
FORMWORK
EXPANSION JOINTS
JOINT SEALING COMPOUND
TESTING OF CONCRETE
SHOTCRETE PROJECTION AND PLACING
REBARS ANCHORING INSTALLATION AND TESTING
PRECAST CONCRETE ELEMENTS
POSTENSIONING SYSTEM AND PROCEDURE – METHOD STATEMENT
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 03000 – CONCRETE WORK 1 / 26

DIVISION 03
CONCRETE WORK
SECTION 03100 - FORMWORK

SECTION 03200 - REINFORCEMENT
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 – GENERAL
The contractor should visit the site to ascertain and understand the work to be undertaken, subject to
the following technical specifications and the related bill of quantities. He should prepare a schedule
showing the methodology of completing the work according to drawings details and to the satisfaction of
the owner’s representative. All concrete works should be undertaken according to the present
specifications. Throughout all concrete works, workmanship shall be of the highest standard, and in
accordance with the relevant standards and codes of practice.
The design of the structural elements to be cast is based on the following:

- Concrete crushing strength as measured and tested on cylinders, at 28 days, will be as follows:
- f’c = 60MPa for interior columns and walls from third basement to fifth floor except ramps' walls.
- f’c = 45MPa for interior columns and walls from sixth floor up to eleventh floor.
- f’c = 35MPa for interior columns and walls from twelfth up to roof floor.
- f’c = 45 Mpa for post tensioned slabs and raft foundation.
- f’c = 35 Mpa for all other structural elements, i.e. spread footings, slab on grade, stairs,
R.C. basements’ slabs, peripheral basement walls and ramps’ walls and basement stairs’ walls.
- f’c = 20Mpa for plain blinding concrete.
- Moreover cement Type V (with MICRO Silica) shall be used in all underground elements in contact
with soil, i.e. Foundation, slab and tie beams on grade, peripheral basement walls. Soil Investigation
report should also be consulted. Cement type II shall be used in all other structural elements (i.e.
internal columns and walls, slabs, stairs, etc.).
- Steel reinforcement should meet the following strength:

fs = 500 MPa for High deformed bars (Grade-75).
fs = 235 MPa for Mild steel.
fs = 500 MPa for welded wire fabric, if any, conforming to ASTM A185.
Steel reinforcement, provided by the contractor, should be placed in the various structural elements as
per drawings details.
The contractor should take all necessary measures such as laboratory tests on concrete cylinders and
steel reinforcement rods to ensure the above mentioned hypotheses.
The contractor shall specify all concrete mixes. The minimum allowable strength as well as the
minimum cement content, the maximum aggregate size and workability (slump) are specified under
“Classes of Concrete”. Within these limits the contractor shall be free to design his mixes and adopt a
water content which will best suit his method of placing. Any additives used should be at the approval of
the owner’s representative. Mix design, workmanship and materials shall be in accordance with BS, NF,
ACI, ASTM or equivalent.
Well qualified and experienced foremen employed by the contractor shall be in charge of the concrete
works. A competent person shall be assigned to supervise all stages of planning and execution of the
concrete works. Site tests shall be carried out under his direct supervision.
The contractor shall assume all responsibility for remedial works for all cast elements that do not comply
with these specifications. All concrete should be vibrated as required. Any additives used should be at
the approval of the owner’s representative.

RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
Specification Sections and Bills of Quantities, apply to this Section.
APPLICABLE TESTS AND CODES
Prior to the commencement of Concrete Works, the contractor shall submit samples to the Engineer
before sending them to the laboratories for testing, to establish the probability of the materials passing
tests for specified requirements.
After the engineer is convinced that the samples with their sources are truly representative samples and
sufficient materials are available on site for the completion of all concrete works under the contract, the
samples shall be approved and sent to the laboratories for testing.
The contractor shall have the tests made, at his own expense in the laboratories approved by the
engineer.
All concrete aggregates, cement and water shall be sampled and tested as frequently as deemed
necessary by the engineer. All test samples shall be supplied by the contractor at his own expense.
Samples shall be obtained in accordance with the latest editions of the American Society for Testing
and Materials (ASTM), American Concrete Institute (ACI) Code or British Standard Codes of practice or
any equally approved standard.
TESTING AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
All materials to be used in concrete shall conform to test requirements of the following standards latest
edition, and the contractor shall perform any of these tests as required by the engineer in an approved
Laboratory. Test results, bearing the signature of the Laboratory shall be submitted to the engineer.
ASTM C 31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
ASTM C 39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
ASTM C 40 Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete.
ASTM C 42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
ASTM C 78 Flexural Strength of Concrete.
ASTM C 109 Standard Method of Test for compressive strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. (50mm) Cube Specimens)
ASTM C 131 Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by use of the Los
Angeles Machine.
ASTM C 136 Sieves or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate.
ASTM C 138 Unit Weight, Yield, and air content (Gravimetric) of Concrete.
ASTM C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
ASTM C 174 Measuring Length of Drilled Concrete Cores.
ASTM C 192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
ASTM C 87 Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar.
ASTM C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 127 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.
ASTM C 128 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate.
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement.
ASTM C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
ASTM C 172 Sampling Fresh Concrete.
ASTM C 192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
ASTM C 260 Air-entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
ASTM C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
ASTM C 330 Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.
ASTM C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
ASTM C 595 Standard Specifications for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
ASTM C 685 Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing.

ASTM D 98 Calcium Chloride

ASTM D 1751 Performed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
ASTM A 185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete reinforcement.
ACI American Concrete Institute
ACI 211 Recommended Practice for Selection proportions for Normal and
Heavy-Weight Concrete.
ACI 214 Quality Control Charts.
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.
ACI 308 Recommended Practice for Curing of Concrete.
ACI 309 Recommended Practice for consolidation of Concrete.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
ACI 506 Recommended Practice for Shotcreting.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor shall follow the guidelines contained in the latest editions of the codes, specifications
and standards listed above, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
An independent laboratory approved by the engineer at the contractor’s expense shall perform plant
and field inspection and testing of concrete, all ingredients there-in and steel reinforcement.
Materials and installed work may require testing and re-testing as directed by the engineer, at any time
during the progress of the work which shall be carried out by the contractor at his own expense.
The contractor shall provide free access to visit and inspect the materials, stockpiles and facilities,
proposed works, plants and sources of materials by the engineer.
All tests including re-testing of rejected materials and installed work shall be done at the contractor’s
expense.
METHOD STATEMENT
During the mobilization period the contractor shall submit a method statement detailing his proposal for
the organization of all concreting activities at the site as well as off site for the approval of the engineer.
The Contractor shall submit method statements for any particular activity when called for by the
engineer and demonstrate its feasibility through mockups/placement samples of appropriate sizes as
approved and directed by the engineer.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
All materials used shall receive the approval of the owner’s representative and shall be as specified.
Any material disapproved by the owner’s representative shall be removed from the site at the
contractor's expense without delay. The contractor shall at all times maintain on the site sufficient
stocks of materials to ensure proper progress of the work and to allow ample time for tests to be carried
out.
CEMENT
1. General
Cement shall be Portland Type, originating from approved manufacturers, obtained in sealed and
labeled bags, each 50 kgs net capacity, name and brand of the manufacturer shall plainly be identified
thereon and delivered to site in good condition. Cement delivered in bulk shall be accepted only if a
central mixing plant is used. The quality of cement shall conform to the Standard Specification for
PORTLAND CEMENT of ASTM C 50, Type II and Type V (for raft foundation).
Use one brand of cement throughout the project unless otherwise approved by the engineer.

Manufacturer testing certificate (Mill Certificate) shall be provided with each bulk shipment and made
available to the Site. The engineer shall have the right to call for additional testing, the cost of which is
to be born by the Contractor.
2. Storage of Cement
All cement shall be stored in suitable weatherproof and approved storage sheds which will protect the
cement from dampness. These storage sheds shall be erected in locations approved by the engineer.
Provisions for storage shall be ample, and the consignment of cement as received shall be separately
stored in such a manner as to provide easy access for the identification and inspection of each
consignment.
Cement shall be used in the order of its delivery to site; new deliveries shall not be used unless the
cement from earlier deliveries has been completely used. Stored cement shall meet the test
requirements at any time after storage when a retest is ordered by the engineer all at the expense of the
contractor.
Storage of bulk cement shall be tight and waterproof and shall bear a clear indication of the types of the
bulked cement. Where storage is provided for different types of cement or cementitious material,
isolation to prevent intermingling or contamination is necessary.
Cement in bags shall be stored in stacks not more than six bags high. The floor shall be raised above
the surrounding ground level (450mm) and constructed to avoid moisture rise. All cement shall be free
flowing and free of lumps and presence of moisture. Cement in bags shall be used in the order of
delivery. Cement from broken bags shall not be used.
The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the deliveries of cement and of its use in the work.
Copies of these records shall be supplied to the engineer in such form as may be required.
3. Alkali Content
The total alkali content (NA2O + 0.658K2O) shall not be in excess of 0.60 percent by weight of cement
when tested in accordance with "Standard Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement"
ASTM C114.
4. Expansion due to Sulphate Exposure
The expansion in (14) days shall be less than 0.040 percent when tested in accordance with "Standard
Method of Test for Potential Expansion of Portland Cement Mortars Exposed to Sulphate” ASTM C452.
5. Heat of Hydration
The heat of hydration shall not exceed 70 calories per gram at (7) days when tested in accordance with
"Standard Method of Test for Heat of Hydration of Hydraulic Cement" ASTM C186.
6. Autoclave Expansion
The autoclave expansion shall not exceed 0.80 percent when tested in accordance with “Standard
Method of Test for Autoclave Expansion of Portland Cement" ASTM C151.
7. Rejection
a. The Contractor shall notify the engineer of dates of delivery so that there will be sufficient
time for sampling the cement, either at the mill or upon delivery.

b. The provisional acceptance of the cement at the mill shall not deprive the engineer of the
right to reject after retesting of the soundness of the cement at the time of delivery of the
cement to site.
c. Packages of cement varying by 2% or more from the specified weight shall be rejected and
if the average weight of packages in any consignment, as shown by weighing 50 packages
taken at random, is less than that specified, the entire consignment shall be rejected and
the Contractor shall remove it forthwith from the Site at his own expense and replace it with
cement of satisfactory quality.
d. Stale cement or cement reclaimed from cleaning bags shall not be used. Cement which for
any reason has become partially set, or contains lump or caked cement, shall be rejected.
e. Cement not complying with the requirements of ASTM C150 specifications shall be
rejected. Blended cement must comply with ASTM C595 specifications.
f. Cement stored for more than 3 months from the production date shall not be used.
AGGREGATES
1. General Requirements
All aggregates shall consist of tough, hard, durable uncoated particles. The contractor shall be
responsible for the processing of this material to meet the requirements of the specifications. Approval
of aggregate quality and/or gradation shall not waive the responsibility of the contractor to provide
concrete of having the minimum strength specified.
2. Storage
Coarse and fine aggregates shall be delivered and stored separately on site in such a manner as to
prevent segregation and contamination or the intrusion of foreign materials. Aggregate which has
become segregated or contaminated with foreign matter during storage or handling will be rejected and
shall be removed and replaced with material of acceptable quality at the contractor's expense,
Aggregates of the quality and color selected shall be stored in sufficient quantity to avoid interruption of
concreting work at any time.
Delivered aggregates shall be kept separate from previous batches, and shall be stored for at least
three working days before use to allow for inspection and relevant tests to be carried out. Sampling of
aggregate shall be conducted randomly from stockpiles/bins
FINE AGGREGATES
All fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates of
ASTM C-33.
It shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, shale, alkali, coated grains, or
similar laminated materials such as soft and flaky particles, or any material which may attack the
reinforcement, in such a form and in sufficient quantity to affect adversely the strength and durability of
the concrete. Fine Aggregate passing sieve No. 4 shall not contain any voided shells.
Fine aggregate from different sources of supply shall not be mixed or stored in one pile nor used
alternately in the same class of construction or mix.
Fineness modulus: 2.50 - 3.15
Organic Impurities: The color shall be lighter than standard color and have an intensity not darker than
two-thirds the intensity of the standard color solution of ASTM C-40 (Not darker than Plate 2 as
determined by the Standard Method of Test for Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete).
Chlorides soluble in dilute: Not more than 0.10 percent by weight when expressed as Nitric Acid sodium
chloride (NaCl).

Total acid soluble sulphates: Not more than 0.50 percent by weight sulphates when
expressed as sulphur trioxide (SO3).
Mortar strength Compression ratio is not less than 95%.
Soundness Weighted average loss when subjected to 5 cycles of the soundness test using magnesium
sulphate, not more than 10%.
Sand equivalent: Not less than 70%
Fine aggregates shall conform to the detailed requirements given in the following Table 1.
TABLE 1
GRADING SIEVE PERCENT PASSING

3/8 100
No. 4 95-100
No. 8 80-100
No. 16 50-85
No .30 25-60
No. 50 10-30
No. 100 2-10
No. 200 0-30
Fines Modules 2.50-2.15
COARSE AGGREGATES
All coarse aggregate for concrete shall conform to Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates of
ASTM Designation: C-33. Coarse aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel, or crushed stone,
having hard, strong durable pieces, free from undesirable material and obtained from an approved
source.
Coarse aggregate shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, alkali, laminated
materials, or any material which may attack the reinforcement, in such a form or in sufficient quantity to
affect adversely the strength and durability of the concrete.
Coarse aggregates shall be washed thoroughly with demineralized water to ensure compliance with the
appropriate requirements and limitations of the specifications. The Contractor shall provide and
maintain for this purpose approved washing plant and equipment.
2. Deleterious Substances
The amount of deleterious substances shall not exceed the following limits:
- Maximum Permissible Limit Percent by Wt.

• Soft fragments 2.0
• Coal and lignite 0.5
• Clay lumps 0.25
• Materials passing the No. 200 sieve 1.0
• Thin or elongated pieces (length
Greater than 5 times average thickness) 4.0
• Other local deleterious substances
Chlorides soluble in dilute Nitric Acid
when expressed as sodium Chloride (NaCl) 0.05
• Total acid soluble sulfates when
expressed as sulpher trioxide (SO3) 0.5
3. Percentage of Wear
Coarse aggregate shall conform to the following requirements.

Percentage of wear, Los Angeles test, not more than 30%
4. Soundness
When the coarse aggregate is subjected to five alternations of the sodium sulphate soundness test, the
weighted loss shall not exceed 10%. In the event of failing to obtain a satisfactory result it shall be
subjected to an alternate freezing thawing test.
5. Grading
Coarse aggregates shall be supplied in the nominal sizes specified and shall be graded in accordance
to ASTM C33 for single sized aggregates
It shall meet the following gradation and shall be uniformly graded within the limits stated in table 2 here
below:
TABLE 2
PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT PASSING

Grading (3/4” to no.4) Grading (1” to no.4) Grading (2” to no. 4)
2 1/2 inch - - 100
2 inch - - 95-100
1 1/2 inch - 100 -
1 inch 100 95-100 35-70
3/4 inch 95-100 - -
1/2 inch - 25-60 10-30
3/8 inch 20-25 - -
no.4 0-10 0-10 0-5
no.8 0-5 0-5 -
no.200 0-1 0-1 0-1
6. Combined Aggregates
Approved fine and coarse aggregate in each batch of concrete shall be combined in proportions as
approved by the engineer, according to test results giving the required compressive concrete stress as
specified per type of concrete.
The combined aggregate gradation using the 3/4-in. to No. 4 gradation shall be used for concrete
members with reinforcement too close to permit proper placement and consolidation of the concrete.
Changes from one gradation to another shall not be made during the progress of the work unless
approved by the engineer. Such changes are admitted only after being proved by test results.
No part of the aggregates shall contain any mineral known to have a potential to cause alkali silica, alkali
silicate, alkali carbonate or any other damaging chemical reactions between alkalis and aggregates.
In no case shall materials passing the 0.075 mm sieve exceed 3.5 % by weight of the combined
aggregate.
When two consecutive averages of five tests are outside of the specified limits, the contractor shall take
immediate steps, including a halt to production, until remedied.
Aggregates shall be frequently tested and shall comply with the requirements stated in the Table 3.

T A B L E 3 - Minimum testing requirements for aggregates to be used in concrete
Test description Frequency Test method Permissible limit
ASTM Fines Coarse

Grading Twice per
Standard Standard
week
Material finer than Twice per
Max. 3% a Max. 1% b
0.075 mm week
Clay lumps and friable Once per 3
Max.2
particles months
Lightweight pieces Once per 3
Max. 0.5
months
Organic impurities Twice per Lighter than
N.A
week standard color
Acid Soluble chlorides: Once per
Prestressed month
Max. 0.01% Max. 0.01%
concrete and steam cured BSI
structural concrete
Max. 0.05% Max. 0.03%
Other
Acid soluble sulfate Once per
BSI Max. 0.3% Max. 0.3%
month
Soundness Once per 3
Max. 10 Max. 10
months
Los Angeles Abrasion Once per 3
N.A Max. 30
months
Specific gravity and water Fortnightly
2% 2%
absorption
Potential reactivity At the start of Not reactive Not reactive
ASTM C289 the project
ASTM C227 once/year 6 month expansion 0.1% Max.
Sand equivalent Twice per Not less
N.A
week than 50
N.A (not applicable)
In the case of manufactured sand, if the material finer than the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve consists of the dust
of fracture, essentially free of clay or shale, these limits are permitted to be increased to 5 and 7 %,
respectively.
This percentage is permitted to be increased to 1.5 if the material is essentially free of clay or shale; or if
the source of the fine aggregate to be used in the concrete is known to contain less than the specified
maximum amount passing the 75-µm (No. 200) sieve.
WATER
1. Quality of Water
Water for mixing of concrete shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, or any other
deleterious mineral and/or organic matter. It shall not contain chlorides such as sodium chloride in excess
of 500 ppm or sulphates such as sodium sulphate in excess of 500 ppm. It shall not contain any impurities
in amount sufficient to cause a change in the time of setting of Portland cement of more than 10%, nor a
reduction in compressive strength of mortar of more than 5% compared to results obtained with distilled
water.
The pH of the water for mixing and curing of concrete shall not be less than pH 4.5 or more than pH 8.5.
2. Tests for Water

The water to be used in concrete, including wash water, shall be clean and free from harmful matter in
suspension or solution and shall satisfy the recommendations given in ASTM C94 sec.5.1.3.
In sampling water for testing, care shall be taken to ensure that the containers are clean and that samples
are representative.
The engineer has the right to ask for sampling of water and testing it and its cost is to be borne by the
contractor. Testing shall comprise the physical and chemical analysis stated in ASTM C94 as requested
by the engineer.
ADMIXTURES
Admixtures and additives (water reducing additives, retarders, etc.) shall be used only with the prior
approval of the engineer. Additives shall be subjected to tests before approval and during progress of
work on site at the discretion of the engineer. All costs incurred towards all tests shall be borne by the
contractor.
The proposed dosage and method of use for admixtures shall be submitted to the engineer together with
the following data:
- Compliance of the admixture with ASTM C494 as a job mix with the typical dosage and detrimental
effects of under dosage and over dosage.
- The chemical name(s) of the main active ingredient(s) in the admixture.
Admixtures shall conform to one of the following standards:
- ASTM C494 Chemical admixtures for concrete.
- ASTM C1017 Chemical admixtures for use in flooring Concrete.
Admixtures/Additive shall:
- have no adverse effect on the shrinkage and water tightness properties of finished concrete.
- have not any added chloride (0%, Calculated as calcium chloride by weight of cement in the concrete).
The contractor shall submit results of concrete trial mix (es) and clearly specify the intended dosage of
admixture with necessary documentation. Trial mixes shall be verified by an approved independent
laboratory.
The contractor shall verify the performance of admixture every 3 months period to verify the type of
admixture being used and its consistency. Samples shall be selected in the presence of the engineer and
tests shall be conducted by an independent testing agency.
SHOTCRETE MATERIALS (if required)
In addition to the specified material requirements for concrete, shotcrete materials should comply with the
requirements of ASTM C1436-99.
Admixtures to shotcrete to comply with ASTM C1141-95
CYCLOPEAN CONCRETE MATERIALS
Cyclopean concrete shall contain not less than 250 Kg of cement per cubic meter of concrete, with large
broken stone spells or boulders ranging in size from 10 to 25 cm. The boulders or spells shall be
incorporated into the concrete and shall not exceed 40 % of the total volume

REINFORCING STEEL
Reinforcing steel shall be similar or equivalent to the following specification all to the approval of the
engineer:
a) Mild steel bars complying with ASTM A15 or BS 4449

b) Cold worked high bond bars complying with ASTM A432 or BS 4461.
c) Hot rolled high bond bars complying with ASTM A431 or BS 4449
Tying devices shall be black annealed mild steel 16 gauge rust-proof binding wire approved by the
engineer, or proprietary ties approved by the engineer.
Mild steel shall have the following characteristics:
i) Minimum tensile strength 42 Kgs/mm2

ii) Minimum yield stress of limit of elasticity 24 Kgs/mm2
iii) Minimum elongation at breaking point 22%
High bond steel shall have the following characteristics:
i) Minimum tensile strength 60 Kgs/mm2

ii) Minimum yield stress 50 Kgs/mm2
iii) Minimum elongation at breaking point 12-14%
REBAR ANCHORING CEMENT GROUT
Whenever needed, to be used under approval of the engineer, the product shall comply with the following:
- Adhesive bond agent.
- Ensure good bonding and rapid curing injection system with good handling system.
- Cementitious reaction that improves stiffness and bonding.
- Negligible material shrinkage.
- Very strong bond between rebars and concrete similar to that of cast insitu reinforcement.
DRY MORTAR AND NON SHRINK GROUT (if required)
- Dry mortar, if required in some areas, should be composed of 1/1 portions of cement and sand. A minor
quantity of water should be added to the mixture in order to permit placing of mortar by hand, then to be
hammered to its final position into gaps.
- Alternatively, non shrink grout, if used, should be a packaged dry, rapid hardening cementitious material
complying with ASTM C928-00.
HOLLOW CORES PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED RIBS
Hollow cores precast prestressed ribs specifications shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.
PVC FLEXIBLE WATER STOP
To be used to seal construction joints wherever the concrete structure will be under hydrostatic pressure
and the water tank.
It should comply with the requirements of B.S. 2571 and B.S. 2782.
It should be tested according to ASTM – D-412/D-624/D-746.
It should be composed of high quality PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride), for long durability, be easy to install and to
weld on site. It should be suitable for high water pressure, should present a tensile strength >12N/mm2,
an elongation >350%, alkali resistant and chemical resistant.
Width should be = 24cm.

NEOPRENE PADS/STRIPS
Neoprene pads/strips if required shall be detailed by the engineer. The contractor shall submit samples
and technical data relating to the neoprene he proposes to use for approval to the engineer.
Neoprene pads/strips shall be properly leveled and placed on a mortar bed, all to the approval of the
engineer.
TENDONS AND MATERIAL FOR POSTENSIONED CONCRETE
All postensioning material shall meet the requirements of ACI318 section 3.5.5 and the requirements of
ASTM.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
CLASSES OF CONCRETE
The structural elements of the project are designed for the following classes of concrete with the
following minimum concrete compressive crushing strength f’c as measured and tested by cylinders at
28 days:
- f’c = 60MPa Class A for interior columns and walls from third basement to fifth floor except ramp walls.
- f’c = 45MPa Class B for interior columns and walls from sixth floor up to eleventh floor.
- f’c = 35MPa Class C for interior columns and walls from twelfth floor up to roof level.
- f’c = 45 Mpa Class B for post tensioned slabs and raft foundation.
- f’c = 35 Mpa Class C for all other structural elements, i.e. spread footings, slab on grade, stairs, R.C.
basements’ slabs, peripheral basement walls and ramps’ walls and basement stair walls.
- f’c = 20Mpa for plain blinding concrete.
- Moreover cement Type V shall be used in all underground elements in contact with soil, i.e.
Foundation, slab and tie beams on grade, peripheral basement walls. Cement type II shall be used in all
other structural elements (i.e. internal columns and walls, slabs, stairs, etc.).
Type of cement to be used and the minimum cement content in the concrete shall be as follows:
- Concrete Class A Cement Type II – 500 Kg/m3 of concrete
- Concrete Class B Cement Type V or II – 450 Kg/m3 of concrete
- Concrete Class C Cement Type V or II – 400 Kg/m3 of concrete
The contractor shall submit to the approval of the engineer, the proposed concrete mix design
(including any additive to be used), in order to ensure the above mentioned compressive strengths.
On the other hand if and where required in other non structural or secondary concrete elements, as
required by the engineer, the following classes of concrete shall be used and their mix proportion shall
be in accordance with table 4 shown below:
TABLE 4
Class of Minimum Maximum Nominal Nominal size Compacting
Concrete compressive Water Cement of aggregate * Factor
Strength Kg/cm2 Cement Content
on cylinders Ratio Per m3 Large Medium
7 days 28 days Percent
D 185 270 46 350 3/4” 3/8” 0.92
E 150 200 55 250 1.1/2” 1/2” -
F As “E” but with 40% spells (cyclopean concrete)
* Or as required for elements < 15cm

The contractor shall carry out tests and prepare calculations to determine for each class of concrete the
proportions of cement, aggregate and water he proposes to use in order to produce the strength as
specified above. Full details shall be submitted to engineer for his approval.
If the contractor desires to vary the mix proportions he shall satisfy the engineer as to his reasons for
doing so and shall submit details of the revised proportions for approval. No change shall be made in
the mix proportions without the written approval of the engineer.
The Contractor shall carry out in presence of the engineer preliminary tests to determine the density of
fully compacted concrete to prove the densities. He shall be paid only for such work if the densities are as
specified.
If the contractor wishes to accelerate the hardening of concrete in order to obtain early strengths for
structural purposes, the engineer may permit the use of suitable additives at his discretion.
The contractor shall carry out, at his own cost, tests to prove to the engineer that the ultimate compressive
strength of the concrete will exceed the 28 days strength as given above by at least 10%.
PROPORTIONS
A) General
After the materials provided by the contractor have been accepted for the works, the proportions and
equivalent batch weights shall be determined.
Where adequate workability is difficult to obtain at the maximum water/cement ratio allowed, the use of
plasticizers or water reducing admixtures may be considered.
B) Trial Mixes
The contractor shall prepare and submit comprehensive concrete mix designs report along with test
results for the following different types and classes of concrete to the engineer for review. Trials mixes
shall be conducted as per ASTM C192.
C) Contents
The mixes required shall be designated in kilograms of fine and coarse aggregate exclusive of free water,
per sack (50 kilograms) of cement and in liters of total mixing water per sack of cement on the basis of the
required amount of cement per cubic meter of concrete.
D) Batch Weights
Since the proportions are designated in terms of aggregates in Saturated Surface Dry condition, the
equivalent batch weights to be used in the work shall be corrected periodically to take into account the
actual moisture content of the aggregates at the time of use.
CONCRETE COMPRESSION AND SLUMP TESTS
A) Test Cylinders
The compression test shall be performed based on standard specification for compressive strength of
cylindrical concrete specimens of ASTM Designation: C-39. Test cylinders made in the field shall have a
diameter of 6" (150mm) and a length of 12" (300mm) in accordance with ASTM Designation: C- 31.
Samples should be obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance
with ASTM C 39. A set consists of at least two test specimens.
The test age for concrete cylinders should be 7 and 28 days or the age designated for determination of
the specified value of f ‘c, or when specified, at the earliest age at which the concrete can receive its full
load or maximum stress.

The specimens cured under the laboratory conditions are for acceptance of the concrete in the structure
so represented. The field cured cylinders shall be used for the control of curing and to determine when the
structure may be put in service. Those cylinder specimens used to control transfer of prestressing force
and early handling conditions for piles should be field-cured under the same conditions as the concrete
piles.
If the average strength tests of the specimens cured under laboratory conditions fall below the minimum
allowable compressive strength at twenty eight days, the concrete mix shall be redesigned.
If the average strength of the specimens cured under field conditions falls below the specified strength,
curing conditions for the concrete placed in the structure shall be changed to secure the required strength
of the concrete. In the determination of the average compressive strength of the specimens, no cylinder
specimen shall have strength less than eighty five (85%) of the specified strength.
The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, two (2) sets of (4) cylinders for each one hundred
(100) cubic meters of concrete or fraction thereof, placed during a single day run, of any one pour forming
a unit of work, or as deemed necessary by the engineer.
All tests shall be carried out on dry specimens after seven and twenty eight days of curing and such
sampling and testing shall be carried out in a laboratory approved by the engineer at the contractor's own
expense.
The engineer may request extra cylinder to be made for testing at three days, whenever he deems
necessary.
B) Slump Tests
Slump Tests shall be carried out periodically to ensure the appropriate water cement ratio in accordance
with the "Standard Method of Test of Slump for Portland Cement Concrete” of ASTM Designation: C143.
The slump of a concrete mix proportion should be limited to the minimum slump that is consistent with the
placement requirements and methods. Slump tests should be performed at the time of placement when
strength samples are obtained or whenever the possibility of an inappropriate slump exists due to the
inconsistency of concrete mix.
C) Test of Hardened Concrete in the Structure
Where the results of specimens indicate that the concrete does not meet specified requirements, core
boring tests, conforming to the current issue of ASTM Designation: C 42 shall be performed, as directed
by the engineer, all at the contractor's expense.
D) Chloride and Sulphate Content
Chloride Content: The total chloride content (water soluble chloride) of concrete made with Ordinary
Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150 Type I & II shall be max. 0.15% expressed as % of chloride
"ion" by mass of cement.
Sulphate Content: The maximum sulphate content shall not exceed 4.0% including sulphate ions in
cement, expressed as % of SO3 by weight of cement.
E) Records
Records of testing of materials shall be kept by the contractor and a copy of each of the test results shall
be supplied to the engineer.

The record form shall include, but will not be limited to, the following information as appropriate:
Source of material, aggregate physical and chemical analysis tests, compatibility tests, date and time of
mix, batch number, ambient temperature, mix temperature, concrete grade, and structural member where
the concrete is placed, compressive strength results, allowable concrete strength, method of curing used,
etc.
MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS
Materials shall be measured by weight, except as otherwise specified or where other methods are
specifically authorized by the engineer. The apparatus provided for weighing the aggregates and cement
shall be suitably designed and constructed for this purpose. Each size of aggregate and the cement shall
be weighed separately.
The accuracy of all weighing devices shall be such that successive quantities can be measured to within
1% of the desired amount. Cement in standard packages (sack) need not be weighed. The mixing water
shall be measured by a measuring device, susceptible of control, accurate to 1% of the capacity of the
tank but not exceeding 2 liters. All measuring devices shall be subject to the engineer's approval.
MIXING OF CONCRETE
A) General
Unless otherwise authorized by the engineer, concrete shall be mixed in an automated stationary mixer.
The mixing of concrete or mortar shall not be permitted when the ambient temperature is below 5 ºC.
The concrete temperature should be kept as low as practical to improve placement and structural
qualities.
B) Mixing Concrete
The concrete shall be mixed in an approved central batching plant and the weights of materials used for
each batch shall not exceed the manufacturer's rated capacities for the machine.
The batching plant shall be kept clean, free from hard or partially set cement, and well maintained in good
working order.
The time allowed for mixing (after all the materials have been placed in the mixer) shall be sufficient for
thorough mixing to take place. No hand mixing of concrete shall be allowed.
Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh
concrete is mixed.
C) Ready Mixed Concrete
Concrete from approved suppliers of ready mixed concrete with proven record, shall be used in the works
after satisfying all the requirements of these specifications and ASTM C-94, "Standard specifications for
ready mixed concrete".
The materials shall not be mixed for less than 1 minute after all ingredients have been discharged to the
drum. Mixing time shall comply with ASTM C94 sec 11.3.1
Prior to commencement of the works the contractor shall furnish the following details to the engineer in
addition to the concrete satisfying all the requirements stated in the relevant clauses:
- Name and qualification of supplier(s).
- Location of the supplier(s) plant and travel time to the site.
- Certificate of quality assurance.
- Quality control facilities.
- Certificate and test reports on concrete production and products.

- Source(s) of aggregates, cement, etc…

- Quality of water aggregates and cement.
- Production capacities.
- Supplier's test certificate giving results of tests of aggregates for workability, strength and chloride
content shall be submitted by the contractor to the engineer at weekly intervals.
- Any other relevant data such as workability of concrete, admixtures, etc.
- C.V. of personnel ear-marked for the project, (approved personnel shall not be changed without prior
approval of the engineer.
Ready mixed concrete, mixed off site shall be transported in approved truck mixers and shall be
accompanied by a computer printout indicating the following:
- Brand name of admixtures and their quantities.

- Cement type
- Quantity of Concrete.
- Actual batched weights of cement, aggregates, water and admixtures.
- Date and time of charging the truck from the batching plant.
Central-mixed concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a stationary mixer and shall be then delivered using a
truck agitator. ASTM C 94 limits the volume of concrete charged into the truck to 80% of the drum or truck
volume.
When partially mixed concrete, with final mixing and transportation being done in a revolving-drum truck
mixer, the volume of concrete charged into the truck is limited to 63% of the drum volume as stated in
ASTM C 94.
D) Truck Mixers
Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the engineer, shall be of the revolving drum type, watertight,
and so constructed that the concrete can be conveyed and discharged into the pumps at site maintaining
the uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass.
The maximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not exceed the maximum rated capacity of the mixer as
stated by the manufacturer and stamped in metal on the mixer.
Before discharge of concrete transported in truck mixers, the drum should again be rotated at mixing
speed for about 30 revolutions to re-blend possible stagnant spots near the discharge end into the batch.
Mixers should be properly maintained to prevent mortar and dry material leakage. Inner mixer surfaces
should be kept clean and worn blades should be replaced.
Mixers not meeting the performance tests referenced in ASTM C94 should be taken out of service until
necessary maintenance and repair corrects their deficient performance.
E) Transporting and Placing Concrete
Concrete, after being discharged from the mixer, shall be transported as rapidly as possible to its final
position in the works by means that shall be approved by the engineer, and which shall prevent
adulteration, segregation, loss or contamination of the ingredients.
The concrete shall be placed and compacted in its final position within 90 minutes of the water being
added to the mix. However, this time of 90 minutes may be increased with the use of approved retarders
at the discretion and approval of the engineer, depending on the necessity and circumstances. On no
account shall additional water be added nor is further mixing permitted.
The containers that convey the concrete shall at all times be kept clean and free from hardened or
partially hardened concrete.
The use of chutes, spouts or piped pumping shall be permitted only with the written approval of the
engineer.

If the contractor proposes the use of piped pumping for the transporting and placing of concrete, he shall
submit a method statement indicating full details of the equipment and operating system he proposes to
use for the approval of the engineer.
On approval the Contractor shall ensure that shocks shall not be transferred from the pipeline to the
formwork, previously laid concrete or the structure.
The initial discharge of any pumped concrete shall be discarded and not be incorporated in the permanent
works.
When concrete is conveyed by chutes or pipes, the size and design of the plant and pipes shall be so
selected to ensure continuous flow in the chute or pipe.
The slope of the chute or the pressure of the pump shall allow the concrete to flow without the use of any
water additional to that approved by the engineer to produce the required consistency and without causing
segregation of the ingredients.
The delivery end of the chute or pipe shall be as close as possible to the final point of deposit.
The chute or pipe shall be thoroughly flushed with water before and after each working period and kept
clean. The water used for this purpose shall be discharged outside and away from any permanent works.
F) Plant Mix
Mixing at a central plant shall conform to the applicable requirements of the Standard Specification for
Ready-Mixed Concrete of ASTM: C-94 and this Specification.
The concrete shall be mixed in a fully automatic computerized batching plant. The mixing machines
(scales/meters, etc.) shall be tested and calibrated for their accuracy by a specialist at regular intervals of
at least six months or such periods as approved by the engineer.
Relevant certificates shall be submitted to the engineer for his perusal/approval before the
commencement of works and after each test or calibration.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within 1 % for cement, 2% for aggregates and 1% for
water. The measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean, serviceable condition.
The weights of fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for any free water contained in them.
Accordingly the amount of water to be added shall be reduced by this amount of free water contained in
the aggregates.
The engineer shall approve the method of determining the free water content immediately before mixing
begins each day and further during the day as the engineer desires.
Admixtures that have been approved, as part of the design mix shall be added by approved automatic
dosing equipment capable of feeding fixed quantities into the mixing water before the water is charged
into the mixer.
The contractor shall ensure that the materials used for each batch in the mixer do not exceed the
manufacturer's rated capacity for the machine. The machine shall be kept clean, free from any residual
material after depositing each batch of concrete and the mixer drum shall be washed and cleaned out
immediately following the completion of each concreting operation or when changing to a mix using a
different type of cement.
Site mixed concrete shall not be used without the specific written permission of the engineer. No hand
mixing of concrete shall be permitted. However the ready mix supplier may erect a batching plant on site
to the approval of the engineer.

G) Re-tempering
The concrete shall be mixed only in such quantities as are required for immediate use and any concrete
which has developed initial setting shall not be used. Concrete, which has partially hardened, shall not be
re-tempered or remixed.
HANDLING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A) General
Prior to pouring concrete in any structure, the contractor shall secure a written order to commence from
the engineer.
Concrete shall only be placed after the engineer has examined and approved the positioning, fixing and
condition of the reinforcement and any other items to be embedded, and the cleanliness, alignment and
suitability of the containing surfaces.
B) Placing of Concrete
The concrete shall be placed in the position and sequences as directed by the engineer and then
deposited as near as possible to its final position in such a manner as to avoid segregation of the
concrete, or displacement of the reinforcement or formwork.
It shall be further deposited in regular courses or layers not exceeding 300 mm thickness and
mechanically compacted, unless otherwise directed by the engineer.
The contractor shall so organize his work that the placing of concrete is efficient and continuous between
specified or approved construction joints. When vertical lifts of concrete are interrupted or delayed for
more than 20 minutes, the surface of the unfinished concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed
with cement grout immediately before fresh concrete is added.
The first layer of new concrete placed shall not exceed 150 mm in depth and particular care shall be taken
with compaction of this layer to ensure a good bond. With vertical sections the unfinished concrete shall
be finished off with a clean surface and left for 24 hours to set before any further concrete is placed.
The surface shall then be thoroughly cleaned of all loose and foreign matter and laitance which may
necessitate the temporary removal of the formwork before placing the remaining concrete.
Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely for more than 1.5m. To convey the concrete as near as
possible to its final position, drop chutes of rubber or metal shall be used for small sections and bottom
dump buckets or other suitable vessels for large sections.
Laying of thin sections (such as floor slabs) in two courses shall not be permitted except where specified
or ordered by the engineer.
Reinforced concrete must not be placed directly upon the ground. Where blinding concrete is used as a
base it shall be of grade 15 mix laid over the ground to provide a clean working surface.
Great care shall be taken to prevent sand or other foreign matter from being introduced into the concrete
from the workmen's boots or any other source. Structural concreting against open excavations as a back
shutter will not be permitted unless approved by the engineer.
C) Compaction and Vibration
Full compaction of the concrete shall be achieved throughout the entire depth of the layer and generally
vibrators shall be used to achieve this. The concrete shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork and
around the reinforcement and successive layers shall be thoroughly worked together. Air bubbles formed
during mixing shall be expelled as far as practical and particular care shall be taken where sloping
formwork is used.

Unless otherwise directed by the engineer, approved power driven vibrators shall be inserted at such
distances apart or applied in such a manner as will ensure that the concrete is satisfactorily and uniformly
compacted.
Immersion vibrators shall penetrate the full depth of the layer and when the underlying layer is of fresh
concrete shall enter and re-vibrate the layer to ensure the successive layers are knitted together. Over
vibration (causing segregation, surface laitance or leakage through the formwork) shall be avoided.
Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly and vertically to prevent the formation of voids. Vibrators
shall not be used to work the concrete along the forms, or in such a way as to damage formwork, other
parts of the works, or displace the reinforcement. External vibrators shall not be used except with the
approval of the engineer.
D) Construction joints
Where construction joints are shown on the drawings or otherwise called for, they shall be formed at right
angles to the axis of the member concerned by the insertion of rigid stopping off forms. These forms shall
be so made that they shall produce on the face of the joint a suitable grooved or indented surface to the
approval of the engineer to act as a bond with the concrete placed against it subsequently.
Where such joints are arranged to form a feature of the architectural or esthetic treatment of the work they
shall be defined by means of rebates or grooves along the exposed edges of the joints. The position of
any construction joints not shown on the drawings shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.
Where rebates or grooves as described above are not called for, construction joints at finished faces shall
be defined by placing the concrete up to a timber batten fixed to the formwork. Any rebates so formed
shall have a depth not greater than 20 mm measured parallel to the finished face.
The upper surface of lifts of concrete in walls and columns shall be horizontal unless otherwise specified.
Before concrete is placed against a construction joint already formed, the latter shall be well hacked and
wire brushed to remove all laitance so that the aggregate is exposed over the whole of the concrete face.
It shall then be scrubbed, cleaned and saturated with water and the face rendered with a layer of cement
mortar 1 cm thick against which the freshly mixed concrete shall be immediately deposited and thoroughly
punned. Where a joint will be permanently visible the mortar shall be kept back at least 5 cm from the
exposed face of the concrete.
The cost of forming all construction joints including rebates, grooves, battens and the like as described
shall be included in the rates for concrete.
E) Concrete in Hot Weather
Throughout the summer months and during hot weather suitable means shall be provided to ensure that
the temperature of the concrete when deposited does not exceed 32 degrees C. Aggregate stockpiles
shall be shielded from direct sunshine and sprayed with fresh water, especially when evaporation rates
are high, due allowance shall be made for the extra water in the concrete mix design.
Mixing water shall be refrigerated, or have flake ice added and cement shall be stored in white colored
insulated silos or sheds. The contractor shall erect all necessary shades over and around the concrete
being poured to prevent the sun's rays from coming into direct contact with the surface of the concrete or
the formwork for a period of at least seven days from the time of pouring the concrete.
The means of shading shall be by the use of hessian, interwoven palms, grass mats or the like,
suspended on a suitable framework approved by the engineer. A suitable air gap shall be maintained
between the undersides of the shades and the surface of the concrete.
Concrete placing shall be completed as quickly and efficiently as possible to reduce transit time. Curing of
exposed concrete surfaces shall be immediately carried out as specified herein.

F) Damaged Work
Should any concrete be damaged through neglect in taking the foregoing precautions, or for any other
negligence on the part of the contractor the engineer may, at his discretion, it require the damaged work to
be removed and reinstated by the cntractor at his own expense.
G) Placing of cyclopean concrete
Stone and concrete shall be placed in alternate layers and in such a way that no stone shall be in contact
with another or with the sides of the shuttering. All faces of cyclopean concrete shall show sound well
compacted concrete.
Spells or boulders shall be clean, free from dirt or earth and shall be soaked in water prior to incorporate
into the concrete. Spells or boulders shall be free from sharp or angular edges.
REINFORCEMENT BARS
A) General
The contractor shall prepare for his own use bar bending Schedules from the information given on the
drawings and specifications. These schedules shall be submitted to the engineer for approval which shall
in no way relieve the contractor of his responsibility for the correctness of these schedules.
All reinforcement shall be placed strictly in accordance with the drawings and as instructed in writing by
the engineer. Nothing shall be allowed to interfere with the required disposition of the reinforcement, and
the contractor shall ensure that all parts of the reinforcement are placed correctly in position and are
temporarily fixed where necessary to prevent displacement before or during the process of tamping and
ramming the concrete in place.
The ties, links or stirrups connecting the bars shall be taut so that the bars are properly braced the inside
of their curved part shall be in actual contact with the bars, around which they are intended to fit.
B) Type and Quality of Steel Reinforcement
1. Hot-Rolled Steel Plain Rods and Bars
Hot-rolled steel plain rods and bars shall conform to the strength requirements and minimum
elongation of the Standard Specification for Deformed Billet-Steel Bars of Grade 40 with minimum yield
strength 2350 kg/cm2 (35000 psi) for concrete reinforcement of ASTM Designation (A- 615) or equivalent.
2. Hot-Rolled Deformed Steel Rods and Bars
Deformed steel rods and bars shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specification for
Deformed Billet-Steel Bars of Grade 60 with minimum yield strength 4200 kg/cm2 (60000 psi) for
Concrete Reinforcement of ASTM Designation (A-615) or equivalent.
C) Wire
Wire for binding reinforcement bars shall be soft black annealed mild steel wire. The diameter of the Wire
shall not be less than l6 S.W.G. (1.6mm) and the binding shall be twisted tight with proper pliers. The free
ends of the binding wire shall be bent inwards.
D) Order Lists
Before ordering material, all order lists and bending diagrams detailed in accordance with the latest
revision of ACI Building Code shall be furnished by the contractor for the approval of the engineer, and no
material shall be ordered before such lists and steel bending diagrams have been approved. The approval
of order lists and bending diagrams by the engineer shall in no way relieve the contractor of his
responsibility for the correctness of such lists and diagrams. Any expenses incurred to the revision of

material furnished in accordance with such lists and diagrams to make it comply with the design drawings
including cut and waste shall be borne by the contractor.
E) Protection of Material
Steel reinforcement shall be protected at all times from damage. When placed in the works, it shall be free
from dirt, detrimental scale, paint, oil, loose, rust, grease or other foreign substances.
F) Fabrication
Bar reinforcement shall be bent to the shapes shown on the drawings and steel bending diagrams,
bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the reinforcement of concrete. All bars shall be bent cold,
unless otherwise permitted by the engineer. No bars partially embedded in concrete shall be bent except
as shown on the plans or specifically permitted by the engineer.
All reinforcement shall cut and/or bent in accordance with BS 4466, or equivalent.
G) Placing and Fastening
All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the position shown on the drawings and firmly held
during the placing and setting of concrete. Bars shall be tied at all intersections except where spacing is
less than 300mm in each direction, in which case alternate intersections shall be tied.
Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of stays, blocks, ties, hangers, or other approved
supports. Blocks for holding reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of
approved shapes and dimensions or approved metal chairs.
Metal chairs which are in contact with exterior surface of the concrete shall be galvanized. Layers of bars
shall be separated by precast mortar blocks or by other equally suitable devices. The use of pebbles,
pieces of broken stone or brick, metal pipe and wooden blocks shall not be permitted.
Reinforcement in any member shall be placed and then inspected and approved by the engineer before
the placing of concrete begins. Concrete placed in violation of this provision shall be rejected and its
removal shall be required.
H) Splicing
All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on the drawings. Splicing of bars, except
where shown on the drawings, shall not be permitted without the written approval of the engineer. Splices
shall be staggered as far as possible.
Additional splices, other than those shown on the drawings and allowed by the engineer, shall be at the
contractor's own expense.
The cost of all supports for holding reinforcement bars shall be borne by the contractor.
CURING AND PROTECTION
A) General
The method, procedure, materials, and equipment for curing shall be approved by the engineer. Curing
may be accomplished by any of the following methods or combination thereof, as approved.
B) Water Curing
All concrete shall be cured for a period of time required to obtain the full specified strength, but not less
than (7) consecutive days. Unformed surfaces shall be covered with sand, burlap, or other approved fabric
mats, kept continually wet.

If the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be continued as on the unformed
surfaces. When burlap, sand or other approved fabric materials are used, they shall not cause any
undesirable finish such as rough surface and discoloring where exposed to light.
Unhardened concrete shall be protected from heavy rains or flowing mechanical injury and the contractor
shall submit for the engineer's approval his construction procedure which is designed to avoid such an
event.
No fire or excessive heat shall be permitted near or in direct contact with concrete at any time. Water used
for curing shall have the same quality as the water used in concrete.
C) Curing with Curing Media
Curing media shall meet all requirements of the "Specifications for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete" of ASTM Designation: C 309 and "Test for Water Retention by Concrete Curing
Materials" of ASTM Designation: C 156.
The compound shall be applied to the concrete surfaces by means of a sprayer, roller or lamb's wool
applicator and shall be sprayed on. Ample time shall be allowed for the concrete surface to harden and to
prevent any damage.
The compound shall have a drying time not to exceed thirty minutes, and shall be applied undiluted
directly from the manufacturer's labeled container in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and to
the satisfaction of the engineer. The compound shall be completely compatible with adhesives, joint
sealants and cement grout.
FORMWORK
A) Formwork Construction
Temporary formwork shall be constructed of timber, sheet metal or other approved material.
Permanent formwork shall be constructed of concrete panels or blocks of precast concrete, natural stone,
brickwork, or other approved material. Concrete panels or blocks shall have an exposed surface of the
specified quality. They shall have positive anchorage to the structure, and the joints between them shall
be made tight with mortar or by such other means that will prevent the leakage of grout from the concrete.
Formwork shall be so designed and constructed that concrete can be properly placed and thoroughly
compacted.
Formwork shall be firmly supported, and adequately strutted, braced or tied. It shall be capable of
adjustment to the lines and dimensions of the finished concrete, and it shall be sufficiently strong to resist,
without excessive distortion, the pressure of concrete during its placing and compacting and other loads to
which it may be subjected.
It shall not be liable to suffer distortion under the influence of the weather. When concrete is to be
vibrated, special care shall be taken to ensure that the formwork will remain stable and the joints tight. The
contractor shall, if required, supply to the engineer drawings and calculations of the formwork he proposes
to use. The contractor shall allow any settlement or deflection of formwork that is likely to arise during
construction, so that the hardened concrete conforms accurately to the specified line and level.
The Contractor shall also make allowance in the formwork for any camber specified by the engineer to
allow for the elastic deflection of structural members and deflection due creeping of the concrete. In the
absence of any specified camber, the soffit of all beams more than 5 M in span shall be laid to a camber
the amount of which shall equal in cm twice the square of the span in meters divided by the depth of the
beam in cm.
The depth of the beam at all points in the span shall be as specified on the drawing. Formwork shall be
constructed so that the formwork to the sides of members can be removed without disturbing the soffit
formwork or its supports.

Props and supports shall be designed to allow the formwork to be adjusted accurately to line and level
and to be erected and removed in an approved sequence without injury to the concrete.
Supports for formwork shall be sufficiently strong to afford the necessary support without injury to any
portion of the structure. This may mean in some cases that it be carried down to the foundations or other
suitable base.
Props and bracing shall be provided for the temporary support of composite construction where separately
specified. All joints in formwork shall be close-fitting to prevent leakage of grout from the concrete.
At construction joints formwork shall be tightly secured against previously cast or hardened concrete to
prevent the formation of stepping or ridges in the concrete.
Formwork shall be constructed to provide straight and true angles, arises or edges. Where chamfers are
shown on the drawings, the fillets shall be accurately cut to size to provide smooth and continuous
chamfers.
Formwork panels shall be fixed with there joints either vertical of horizontal unless otherwise specified.
Formwork shall be provided to the top surface of concrete where the slope or the nature of the work
requires it.
Provision shall be made for forming holes and chases for services and for pipes, conduits, and other
fixings shown on the drawings.
The material and position of any ties passing through the concrete shall be submitted to The engineer for
approval. Except where corrosion of a metal tie is unimportant, it shall be possible to remove a tie so that
not any of its remaining part embedded in the concrete shall be nearer to the finished surface of the
concrete than the specified cover to the reinforcement. Any holes left after the removal of ties shall be
filled with concrete or mortar of approved composition.
Spaces to be occupied by concrete shall be free from all rubbish, chipping, shavings, sawdust, dirt and
tying wire, etc, before concrete is placed. The formwork to be in contact with the concrete shall be
cleaned, and treated with suitable mold oil or other approved material.
Care shall be taken that oil or composition is kept out from contact with the reinforcement or with concrete
at any construction joints surface. Retarding agents shall not be used except with the permission of the
engineer.
Formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use. Damaged or distorted formwork shall not be used.
B) Formwork for exposed surface (fair faced concrete)
The internal faces of all forms for permanently visible faces shall be true and smooth and lined with resin
bonded plywood except as specified later in this section. Where grooves are called for in the drawings
they shall be formed by timber battens fixed firmly and closely to the formwork.
The full designed cover to the reinforcement shall be maintained at all points. Vertical joints in the plywood
or other lining material shall be arranged to occur as far as possible. Only at intersection of surfaces
horizontal joints shall be leveled around columns.
The contractor shall not use shutter bolts that require a hole or mark on the finished faces concrete unless
such faces will be covered when the works are completed.
Mold oil shall be a non-staining type and shall have no deleterious effect on the strength of the concrete. It
shall be used in the minimum quantities necessary to ensure satisfactory stripping of the forms. Details of
the mold oil shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.
Resin bonded plywood lining to formwork shall be double coated with approved shutter oil before use. The
contractor shall be entirely responsible for the sufficiency and efficiency of the formwork and for its safe

removal. Before commencing work he shall submit to the engineer details of the formwork he proposes to
use.
C) Striking and removal of formworks
Forms shall be removed under skilled supervision in such a manner that will not injure the concrete,
particularly reveals, arises, chamfers and any special moldings. No formwork shall be removed before the
concrete has sufficiently set and hardened.
The minimum periods in days which shall elapse between the placing and compacting of the concrete and
the removal of the forms, for the various parts of a structure, are given in the following table, but these
requirements shall not relieve the contractor of his obligation to delay the removal of the forms, if, in the
opinion of the engineer the concrete has not hardened sufficiently.
Portland Rapid Hardening Cement

Cement
Sides of beams, walls, columns or piles 2 days 1 day

Soffits of beams and slabs (Props left in) 10 days 6 days
Removal of slabs props 14 days 8 days
Removal of beams props 21 days 10 days
Any proposal of the contractor to strike the formwork earlier than the specified periods if submitted along
with a detailed analysis of concrete strength, at which the formwork or props may be struck, to prove that
the deflection and bending stresses are within the allowable limits, shall be reviewed by the engineer.
The decision of the engineer after their review shall be final and binding for the contractor and no claim for
any additional cost or time shall be entertained in this regard.
While concreting upper slabs, beams etc. at least the lower two floors immediately below shall be
adequately supported by props to the satisfaction of the engineer.
After removal of formwork no remedial works shall be attempted until the engineer has inspected the
work. If, in his opinion, any defect cannot be made good satisfactorily he may direct the contractor to
replace such work at the contractor's expense.
Curing shall commence immediately on removal of formwork, as specified under "Protection and curing of
Concrete" in this specification.
EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion joints shall be formed in positions as shown on the drawings or instructed by the engineer, and
shall consist of compressible fiberboard filler material (Flexcell, Celotex or similar) inserted between
reinforced concrete members to form permanent formwork.
Rubberized expansion joint filler may be used instead of the fiberboard, provided it is fully resilient,
resistant to acids and alkalis, and of a density of not less than 40 lbs/cu.ft.
Expansion joints in slabs and beams will be constructed as shown on the drawings or instructed by the
engineer and where called for expanded polystyrene shall be used as lost shuttering.
JOINT SEALING COMPOUND
Poured joint sealing material shall consist of an approved rubber-bitumen compound, complying with the
requirements of U.S. Federal Specification SS-S-164; or a two-components cold applied compound
complying with U.S. Federal Specification SS-S-17- .
Test certificates prepared by an approved testing laboratory, shall be supplied by the contractor to show
that the material does in fact comply with the relevant specification in respect of cone penetration, flow
and bond.

Material to comply with specification SS-S-164 should be heated in a indirectly heated melter-pourer to a
temperature within the manufacturer’s recommended pouring range and shall not be heated at this
temperature for a period longer than the safe heating time stated by the manufacturer.
The melter-pourer shall be cleaned out at the end of each day’s work and material which has been once
heated and allowed to cool shall not be used either alone or with fresh material.
Joints sealed in summer shall be filled so that the sealing compound is flush with the surface of the
concrete. Joints sealed in winter shall be filled to a level 1/4 in below the surface of the concrete.
TESTING OF CONCRETE
All concrete and its components will be subjected to testing by an approved testing laboratory in
accordance with ASTM C873-99 and C39/C39M-01 or to BS 1881. The contractor shall deliver to an
approved laboratory samples of the materials to be tested, in sufficient quantities for the required tests.
Samples shall be chosen at random or as required by the engineer.
Copies of test results shall be delivered to the engineer. All materials failing the appropriate tests shall
immediately be removed from site and replaced with suitable materials.
Concrete structures failing to obtain the required strengths specified in 2.3, will be demolished and made
good unless otherwise directed by the engineer.
The concrete from which test cylinders are to be made shall be freshly mixed and shall be taken from a
batch of concrete prepared in the normal way for actual use in the works. The contractor shall provide a
sufficient number of molds on site for the preparation of test samples. The preparation of test samples and
the testing procedure in general shall be in accordance with ASTM or to BS 1881 requirements.
Testing cylinders shall be cured in the molds under damp sacks or by other approved means for a period
of 24 hours. They shall then be removed from molds and placed in water or damp sand, and subsequently
sent to an approved testing laboratory.
Cylinders shall be indelibly marked with the project title, the cast element reference and the serial number
of the test and shall be accompanied by written request for testing, giving full details regarding the date on
which cylinders were cast, the mix of the concrete and size of aggregate and starting the age at which
tests are required.
Four cylinders shall be provided for each serie of work tests. Two cylinders shall be tested at 7 days and
two at 28 days,. The results must exceed the figures given in 2.3 Table 4. If the results of the tests at 7
days and 28 days are satisfactory then the concrete that the samples represent will be accepted.
Upon notification of unsatisfactory results from the 7 days tests, the contractor may not demolish and
reconstruct concrete structures represented by the particular test. Without laboratory, the result of the
series should prove unsatisfactory, and then at the discretion of the engineer any concrete represented by
the test cubes may be subjected to in-situ tests.
Depending upon the results of such tests the engineer may direct that this concrete be demolished and
reconstructed.
Unless otherwise required by the engineer the number of tests shall be as follows:
a) One series of cylinder tests per day of concreting for each class of concrete.
b) One slump test per concrete pour.
c) One complete serie of tests for each 100 m3 of aggregates delivered on site.
SHOTCRETE PROJECTION AND PLACING (if required)
Wherever needed, dry mix shotcrete shall be used, which is a method that involves the premixing of
cement and aggregates, which are then fed into a special mechanical feeder metering the premixed
materials into a hole.

The material is conveyed through the hose with compressed air to the nozzle of a spray gun which is
outfitted with a water ring where additional water is mixed with cement and aggregates. The mix is jetted
from the nozzle at high velocity onto the prepared concrete surfaces and sprayed in place. It may be
carved or trawled almost immediately.
REBARS ANCHORING INSTALLATION AND TESTING (if required)
If rebars anchors are needed in some particular areas, it should be placed according to manufacturer’s
instructions.
The contractor shall submit to the engineer for approval of the product he intends to use with its technical
specifications and instructions for use and installation.
A standard "pull out test" method for anchor bolts shall be carried out on site before installing operation,
according to ASTM D35-64 and D4436.
PRECAST CONCRETE ELEMENTS
Precast concrete units shall be made in approved molds to accurate dimensions with clean, regular faces
and angles as required. Vibration during precasting shall be introduced as necessary. Tops of precast
units shall be clearly marked so that they are fixed with the reinforcement in its correct position.
POSTENSIONING SYSTEM AND PROCEDURE – METHOD STATEMENT
The contractor shall submit for the approval of the engineer, the post tensioning system which shall be
used in slabs, along with all required technical specifications and description of all used material and
procedures and the method statement that shall be followed, complying with the requirements of ACI and
ASTM.

SUBJECT: SECTION 03331- CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
SECTION 03331
CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in-place architectural concrete including form facings, reinforcement
accessories, concrete materials, concrete mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and flatwork finishes.
2. Division 2 Section "Decorative Cement Concrete Pavement" for surface-imprinted concrete
pavement and finishes.
3. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork; material, fabrication, and installation
requirements for steel reinforcement; and field quality control.
4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants in contraction and other joints
in cast-in-place architectural concrete.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Formed concrete that is exposed to view on surfaces of

completed structure or building and that requires special concrete materials, formwork, placement, or
finishes to obtain specified architectural appearance.
B. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following:
blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and
silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
C. Design Reference Sample: Sample designated by the architect in the contract documents that reflects
acceptable surface quality and appearance of cast-in-place architectural concrete.
D. Reveal: Projection of coarse aggregate from matrix or mortar after completion of exposure operations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Manufacturer; Subject to compliance with the requirements, product that may be incorporated into the
work include but not limited to the following;
1. SAUDI READY MIX
2. FOSAM / FOSROC
3. BOMANITE / BOMACRON
4. Or approved equal
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 03331 – CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 1 / 11
C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of
materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be kept on site for later addition on project.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Show formwork construction including form-facing joints, rustications,
construction and contraction joints, form joint-sealant details, form tie locations and patterns, inserts
and embedments, cut outs, clean out panels, and other items that visually affect cast-in-place
architectural concrete.
E. Placement Schedule: Submit concrete placement schedule before start of placement operations.
Include locations of all joints including construction joints.
F. Samples: For each of the following materials:
1. Form-facing panel.
2. Form ties.
3. Form liners.
4. Coarse- and fine-aggregate gradations.
5. Chamfers and rustications.
G. Samples for Verification: Architectural concrete samples, cast vertically, approximately 18 by 18 by 2

inches (450 by 450 by 50 mm), of finishes, colors, and textures to match design reference sample.
Include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
H. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
I. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with
requirements.
1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.
J. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturer:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Repair materials.
K. Minutes of pre-installation conference.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and

that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities."
B. Source Limitations For Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Obtain each color, size, type, and variety
of concrete material and concrete mixture from one manufacturer with resources to provide cast-in-
place architectural concrete of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
C. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and Section 6,
"Architectural Concrete."
2. ACI 303.1, "Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete."
D. Field Sample Panels: After approval of verification sample and before casting architectural concrete,
produce field sample panels to demonstrate the approved range of selections made under sample
submittals.
E. Produce a minimum of 3 sets of full-scale panels, cast vertically, approximately 48 by 48 by 6 inches

(1200 by 1200 by 150 mm) minimum, to demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and texture
variations.
1. Locate panels as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by architect.

2. Demonstrate methods of curing, aggregate exposure, sealers, and coatings, as applicable.
3. In presence of Architect, damage part of an exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and
texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair of tie holes and surface
blemishes to match adjacent undamaged surfaces.
4. Maintain field sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed work.
5. Demolish and remove field sample panels when directed.
F. Mockups: Before casting architectural concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under
sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of
workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
architect.
2. Build mockups of typical exterior wall of cast-in-place architectural concrete as shown on
Drawings.
3. Demonstrate curing, cleaning, and protecting of cast-in-place architectural concrete, finishes,
and contraction joints, as applicable.
4. In presence of the architect, damage part of the exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and
texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair of tie holes and surface
blemishes to match adjacent undamaged surfaces.
5. Obtain architect's approval of mockups before casting architectural concrete.
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of substantial
completion.
G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for
ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned
with cast-in-place architectural concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Cast-in-place architectural concrete subcontractor.
2. Review concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing
procedures, construction joints, forms and form-removal limitations, reinforcement accessory
installation, concrete repair procedures, and protection of cast-in-place architectural concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork and other form-facing
material requirements.
B. Form-Facing Panels for As-Cast Finishes: Steel, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or other approved non-
absorptive panel materials that will provide continuous, true, and smooth architectural concrete
surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
C. Form-Facing Panels for As-Cast Finishes: Exterior-grade plywood panels, non-absorptive, that will
provide continuous, true, and smooth architectural concrete surfaces, medium-density overlay,
Class 1, complying with DOC PS 1, or Finnish phenolic overlaid birch plywood.
D. Chamfer Strips: Metal, rigid plastic, elastomeric rubber, or dressed wood, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19
mm), minimum; non staining; in longest practicable lengths.
E. Form Joint Tape: Compressible foam tape; pressure sensitive; AAMA 800, "Specification 810.1,
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape"; minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
F. Form Joint Sealant: Elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type M or S, Grade NS, that
adheres to form joint substrates.
G. Sealer: Penetrating, clear, polyurethane wood form sealer formulated to reduce absorption of bleed
water and prevent migration of set-retarding chemicals from wood.
H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated colorless form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect architectural concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
those surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
I. Surface Retarder: Chemical liquid set retarder, for application on form-facing materials, capable of
temporarily delaying final hardening of newly placed concrete surface to depth of reveal specified.
J. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on
forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for steel reinforcement and other
requirements for reinforcement accessories.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded-wire fabric in place; manufacture according to CRSI's "Manual of
Standard Practice."
1. Where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1, gray, plastic-protected bar
supports.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray
a. Type I- Normal, in general for all superstructure and not in contact with soil
b. Type V- Sulfate Resistant, Portland cement shall be applied to all sub-structure in contact
with soil.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Graded
1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

2. Fine Aggregate: Aggregate in particular shall consist of natural sand or manufactured sand or a
combination of both, and shall be composed of lean, hard and durable spherical or cubicle
particles. The final aggregate must comply with the following grading.
Sieve Percent Passing
9.5mm 100
4.75mm 95 – 100
2.36mm 80 – 100
1.18mm 45 – 80
600 microns 25 – 60
300 microns 10 – 25
150 crons 2 – 10
3. Coarse Aggregate shall be generally cubic in shape. The quantity of flat and elongated particles
(length greater than 5 times the average thickness) in size groups of 10 – 19mm and 19 –
25mm, but shall not exceed 15% by weight.
4. Grading by single stock pile or combining separated stock piles so that the nominal maximum
size of the aggregate shall not be more than 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between sides of
the forms, 1/3 of the depth of slabs, nor ¾ of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcement
bars. Coarse aggregate shall comply with the following grading.
Sieve Percent Passing

19mm 100
9.5mm 20 - 55
4.75mm 0 - 10
2.36mm 0–5
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/8-inch (10-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
D. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M except free of wash water from mixer washout
operations.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
C. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures;
color stable, free of carbon black, non-fading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-re-dispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and
bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements.
1. Types I and II, non-load bearing for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of cast-in-place architectural concrete
proportioned on basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed design
mixtures based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Proportion concrete mixtures as follows:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 32 MPa

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.52 by weight
3. Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100
mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm).
C. Cementitious Materials: For cast-in-place architectural concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage,
by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements.
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions
and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish
batch ticket information.
1. Clean equipment used to mix and deliver cast-in-place architectural concrete to prevent
contamination from other concrete.
2. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, embedded items,
and shoring and re-shoring.
B. Limit deflection of form-facing panels to not exceed ACI 303.1 requirements.
C. In addition to ACI 303.1 limits on form-facing panel deflection, limit cast-in-place architectural concrete
surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm).
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide
crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-in-place surfaces. Provide top forms for
inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood rustications, keyways, reglets,
recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
1. Seal form joints and penetrations at form ties with form joint tape or form joint sealant to prevent
cement paste leakage.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
E. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
F. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of cast-in-place architectural concrete.
G. Coat contact surfaces of wood rustications and chamfer strips with sealer before placing
reinforcement, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placing concrete.
J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with surface retarder, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
before placing reinforcement.
M. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and
attach securely to prevent deflection and maintain stability of liners during concreting. Prevent form
liners from sagging and stretching in hot weather. Seal joints of form liners and form liner accessories
to prevent mortar leaks. Coat form liner with form-release agent.
3.2 REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS
A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for fabricating and installing steel
reinforcement. Securely fasten steel reinforcement and wire ties against shifting during concrete
placement.
B. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support
weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for
24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal
operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
1. Schedule form removal to maintain surface appearance that matches approved field sample
panels.
2. Cut off and grind glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties flush with surface of concrete.
B. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of
concrete in place until concrete has achieved 28-day design compressive strength. Remove forms
only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.
C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the work. Do not use split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material. Apply new form-release agent.
D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align
and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for cast-in-place architectural concrete
surfaces.
E. JOINTS
F. Construction Joints: Install construction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction

joints, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. Align
construction joint within rustications attached to form-facing material.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in
girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders
and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near
corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
G. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to
surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not
impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by architect.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, form-release agent, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by
Architect.
C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of
ACI 301.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.
D. Deposit concrete continuously between construction joints. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 303.1.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically
at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm)
into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to
lose plasticity. Do not permit vibrators to contact forms.
E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range
required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen sub-grade or on sub-grade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents.
4. Do not use chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.
F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is contractor's
option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and sub-grade just before placing concrete. Keep sub-
grade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Architectural Concrete Finish: Match Architect's design reference sample, identified and described as
indicated, to satisfaction of Architect.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces.
1. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Maintain uniformity of special finishes over construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 AS-CAST FORMED FINISHES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and
defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding specified limits on
formed-surface irregularities.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an

orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Remove fins and other projections
exceeding specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. Repair and patch tie holes and defects.
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces
and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture.
Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to
coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part Portland cement to one and one-half parts fine
sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white Portland cement in
amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match surrounding concrete.
Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean
burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland
cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
surrounding concrete. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion,
finish surface with a cork float.
C. Form-Liner Finish: Produce a textured surface free of pockets, streaks, and honeycombs, and of
uniform appearance, color, and texture.
3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B. Begin curing cast-in-place architectural concrete immediately after applying as-cast formed finishes to
concrete. Cure according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods that will not
mottle, discolor, or stain concrete:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep exposed surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete continuously

moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces
and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for

curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12
inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period; use cover material and
waterproof tape.
A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for field quality-control
requirements.
3.9 REPAIRS, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING
A. Repair and cure damaged finished surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete when approved by
architect. Match repairs to color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding surfaces and to repairs on
approved mockups.
1. Remove and replace cast-in-place architectural concrete that cannot be repaired and cured to
architect's approval.
B. Protect corners, edges, and surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete from damage; use guards
and barricades.
C. Protect cast-in-place architectural concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination during
remainder of construction period.
D. Clean cast-in-place architectural concrete surfaces after finish treatment to remove stains, markings,
dust, and debris.
E. Wash and rinse surfaces according to concrete finish applicator's written recommendations. Protect
other Work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
1. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of cast-in-place
architectural concrete finishes.
SUBJECT: SECTION 03400 – PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
SECTION 03400
PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDES
A. Precast concrete structures.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The most stringent code shall govern

1. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
3. ACI 350 R - Concrete Sanitary Engineering Structures.
4. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
5. ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
6. ASTM A307 - Specification for Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard
Fasteners.
7. ASTM A325 - Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, Including Suitable Nuts
and Plain Hardened Washers.
8. ASTM A4l6 - Uncoated seven-wire stress-relieved strand for pre-stressed concrete.
9. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
10. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
11. ASTM C94 - Ready Mixed Concrete.
12. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, and Placing Concrete.
13. ACI 311 - Manual of Concrete Inspection.
14. ACI 315 - Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete.
15. ASTM C150 - Portland cement.
16. ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
17. ASTM C330 - Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.
18. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
19. PCI MNL-116 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Pre-stressed
Concrete Products.
20. PCI MNL-120 - Design Handbook - Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete.
21. PCI MNL-123 - Manual on Design of Connections for Precast Pre-stressed Concrete.
22. PCI MNL-127 - Manual on Recommended Practice for Erection of Precast Concrete.
23. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice."
1.03 STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The contractor shall address all anticipated loading conditions as indicated on the drawings, as
specified herein, and as required by local authority and the referred design codes. All load cases shall
be considered and the design shall be based on the governing cases, which produce the greatest
stresses on the structure. For load cases the most onerous load combination of the basic load cases
should be considered such as: tanks empty with saturated soil outside, tanks full with saturated soil
outside, tanks full with dry soil outside and tanks full with no soil pressure outside.
B. Maximum ground water elevation shall be assumed to be at finish grade level. Saturated soil shall be
assumed to exert a minimum equivalent fluid pressure of 90 pcf onto the structure.
C. For all buried structures, they shall be designed to resist buoyancy when empty if it is likely for them to
be under ground water level at any time during service life.
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 03400 – PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1/6
D. Effects on all vertical, horizontal and lifting loads anticipated on the finished structure shall be included
in the analysis and design. Loading from piping and equipment, sand, snow if relevant, 150 psf floor
live load shall be included.
E. All structures shall be watertight.
F. Where conditions arise which are not specifically covered by these notes and specifications, the
Current Standards of ACI 301, 304, 306, 311, 315, 318, 350, and ASTM C94 shall govern.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Submit design calculations and Shop dawings indicating fabrication details, reinforcement, connection
details, support items, member cross-sections and dimensions, gaskets, openings.
C. Indicate design loads, deflections, cambers, bearing requirements, and special conditions.
D. Submit product data indicating standard component configurations, design loads, defections,
cambers, and bearing requirements.
E. Submit data on proposed use of any admixture under provisions of Section 01300.
F. Submit fabricator's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
G. Submit design data under provisions of Section 01300.
H. Submit design data reports indicating calculations for loadings and stresses of fabricated, designed
framing.
I. Submit certificates verifying that the concrete and reinforcement complies with tests and sample
requirements of this Specification Section under provisions of Section 01300.
A. Testing:
1. Certification from independent testing agency supplied by the manufacturer.
2. Cost of Testing: Borne by contractor.
B. Codes and Standards:

1. Except as modified by the requirements specified herein and/or the details shown on thedrawings,
all work included in this section shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following codes and
standards:
a. ACI 301
b. ACI 318
c. PCI MNL-116
d. PCI MNL-120
e. PCI MNL-123
f. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice."
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: Company specializing in manufacturing the Work of this Section with minimum of
three years documented experience.
B. Fabricator must be producer/member of the Pre-stressed Concrete Institute (PCI) and/or

participate in its Plant Certification Program.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver Products to site at such times to ensure continuity of installation.
B. Handle precast members in position consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from
support points.
C. Lifting or Handling Devices: Capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during

manufacture, storage transportation, and erection.
D. Store and protect members to prevent staining, cracking, chipping, spalling, or other physical damage
of concrete.
E. Mark each member with date of production and final position in structure.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATORS
A. Precast concrete manholes, meter pits, etc. shall be as manufactured by Local Manufacturers or
approved equal
.
2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS
1. Water: Potable, clean and free of organic materials, strong acids or alkalis, oils and salt.
2. Portland Cement ASTM-C150, Type I or Type III American manufactures. One (1) brand to be
used throughout project.
3. Sand: (Fine aggregate) shall be clean, sharp, coarse, (minimum fines) hard, natural sand free
from salt, loam, clay and other deleterious materials and shall conform to ASTM C33 or C330.
4. Coarse Aggregate: Shall be well graded, washed gravel or crushed stone and shall conform to
ASTM C33 for normal weight aggregate.
5. Admixtures: Determined by precast fabricator as appropriate to design requirements and

conforming to ASTM C494.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing bars shall be deformed high strength bars conforming to ASTM
A615, Grade 40 or 60.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: Shall conform to ASTM A185.
C. Tensioning Steel Tendons: ASTM A4l6, Grade 250K or 270K, or sufficient strength commensurate
with member design. Steel strand tendons shall be encased with an extruded polypropylene sheath
and completely filled with corrosion inhibitor. Tendons shall be polystrand as manufactured by Lang
Tendons, Inc. or approved equal.
2.04 FORMWORK
A. Forms: Wood, metal, plastic, or other acceptable material that will produce required finish surfaces
and is non-reactive with concrete.
B. Maintain formwork to provide completed precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions
indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified in PCI MNL-116.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic, pre-mixed, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected

silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing
agents. Minimum yield strength of 10,000 psi at 28 days.
B. High Strength Threaded Fasteners: heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy bolts, and hardened
washers complying with ASTM A325. Exposed units galvanized per ASTM A153; others painted with
rust-inhibitive primer.
C. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Log-Carbon steel bolts, regular hexagon nuts and Carbon steel
washers conforming to ASTM A307. Exposed units galvanized per ASTM A153; other painted with
rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Anchorage Hardware: Anchors and couplers for tensioning steel tendons shall be sufficient to
develop the full strength of the tendons they connect. All anchorage hardware shall be compatible with
tensioning steel tendons as recommended by Tendon manufacturer.
E. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting and fastening reinforcing in accordance with CRSI and ACI recommendations.
F. Gaskets: Precast structure shall be constructed to be watertight through the use of integrally cast
rubber or neoprene gaskets. Integrally cast gaskets shall be Dura-Seal III, A-Lok, or equal.
G. Manhole Steps: Grade 60-#3 deformed steel bar coated-polypropylene plastic as manufactured by
M.A. Industries, Inc., East Point, Georgia or approved equal.
H. Manhole frames and covers: Heavy duty Model R1648 as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co. or
approved equal.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication procedure to conform to PCI MNL-116.
B. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast members. Make
records available upon request.
C. Reinforcing steel surface shall be free of rust; mill scale and any coating including ice that could
destroy or reduce bond.
D. Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner injurious to the material.
E. Reinforcement splices at maximum stress shall not be permitted. Laps and splices shall be of
adequate length to transmit stresses. Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered.
F. Cut wire reinforcement and support at proper elevations by standard accessories.
G. Ensure reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other cast-in items are embedded
and located as indicated on shop drawings. Locate anchors where they do not affect position of main
reinforcement or placing of concrete.
H. Tension reinforcement tendons as required to achieve design load criteria.
I. Cast-in required openings with a dimension larger than 6 inches.
J. Concrete Strength: Minimum ultimate compressive strength of the concrete at age 28 days shall be
5000 psi. Slump shall not exceed 4 inches.
K. For early reuse of forms, concrete may be steam cured after an initial set has taken place. The
steam temperature shall not exceed 160 degrees and the temperature shall be raised from normal
ambient temperature at a rate that does not exceed 40 degrees per hour. Steam cured units shall not
be removed from forms until units have sufficient strength to withstand any structural strain that might
be applied during the form stripping process.
2.07 FINISHING
A. Ensure exposed-to-view finished surfaces of precast concrete members are uniform in color and
appearance.
B. Cure members under identical conditions to develop required concrete quality, and minimize
appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.
C. Interior and exterior above grade surfaces - Exposed-to-View Finish: Normal plant finish with fins
and protrusions removed, ground edges and ends, and flat face surfaces.
D. Exterior below grade surfaces - Normal plant finish; normal form joint marks, small surface holes
caused by air bubbles, minor chips, and spalling at edges or ends, without major discoloration will be
tolerated, but no major or unsightly imperfections, honeycomb or structural defects will be permitted.
Apply waterproof coatings in accordance with Section 07175.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and field measurements conform with the
drawings.
B. Ensure that excavation is free of water and precast units will not be placed on frozen or soft
ground.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare support equipment for the erection procedure, temporary shoring and bracing, and induced
loads during erection.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install precast units according to manufacturer's recommendations and the Drawings without
damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair damaged members.
B. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints as erection progresses.
C. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final support is provided. Protect members from staining.
D. Grout open spaces at connections and joints. Provide forms or other acceptable method to retain
grout in place until sufficiently hard to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material and tamp
until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, plumb and level with adjacent concrete
surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout
material from exposed surfaces before it hardens.
E. Do not use power-actuated fasteners for surface attachment of accessory items in pre-cast, pre-
stressed unit unless otherwise accepted by precast manufacturer.
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erect members’ level and plumb within allowable tolerances.
B. Conform to PCI MNL-127.
SUBJECT: SECTION 03490 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
SECTION 03490
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass fiber reinforced concrete fabrications as indicated on the drawings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04720 - Cast Stone.
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Supplementary supports for large items.
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Supplementary supports for large items.
D. Section 06610 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Fabrications.
E. Section 09235 - Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Fabrications.
F. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting and sealing prior to painting.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland cement; 1999a.
B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
1999.
C. ASTM G 23 - Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With
and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 1996.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including dimensions,
finishes, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, and installation
recommendations.
C. Shop Drawings: For custom items, provide drawings showing dimensions, layout, joints, details,
and interface with adjacent work; include field measured dimensions of the spaces where items
are to be installed, if critical to proper installation.
D. Samples: For each custom finish specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm)
square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
A. Installer Qualifications: Regularly engaged and experienced in the installation of glass fiber
reinforced concrete or precast concrete units.
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 03490 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 1/3
A. Transport, lift, and handle units with care, avoiding excessive stress and preventing damage; use
appropriate equipment.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation, in a clean dry
area protected from weather, moisture and damage; store units upright and not stacked unless
permitted by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Local Manufacturers in KSA.
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Fabrications: High density concrete made of ASTM C 150
Portland cement, crushed stone, silica sand, and polymers reinforced with continuous filament
glass fiber mat and structural reinforcing as required; asbestos free.
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's selection.
2. Color: To match Architect's sample.
3. Density: 140 pcf (2240 kg/cu m).
4. Shell Thickness: 3/8” to 3/4 inch (9.5 mm), nominal.
5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 0, smoke developed index of 5;
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Fuel contribution of 3.
6. Weather Resistance: No significant loss in strength or change in appearance after 200
hours accelerated weathering conducted in accordance with ASTM G 23.
7. Flexural Strength: 1000 to 1800 psi (6.9 to 12.4 MPa).
8. Modulus of Elasticity: 2 x 10^5 psi (1370 MPa).
9. Compressive Strength: Over 5000 psi (34 MPa).
10. Variation from Dimensions Indicated on Drawings: Plus and minus 1/8 inch (3 mm),
maximum.
11. Variation from Plane along Edge or Surface: Plus and minus 1/16 inch per linear foot (1.5
mm in 300 mm), maximum.
12. Outside Corner Radius: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch (1.5 to 3 mm).
13. Draft Angle: 3 degrees, minimum, on returns, setbacks, reveals, and grooves.
14. Provide concealed anchorage points for plaster type wire anchors.
15. Provide screwed or bolted anchors with reinforced holes through face of units.
16. Provide anchors and reinforced anchoring points as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed; verify that substrates
are plumb and true.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.
C. Check field dimensions before beginning installation. If dimensions vary too much from design
dimensions for proper installation, notify Architect and wait for instructions before beginning
installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Install supplementary temporary and permanent supports as required for proper installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with applicable code and manufacturer's recommendations, plumb and true
to line; shim where necessary.
B. Provide control joints at not more than 35 feet (10.5 m) on center if not indicated on drawings.
C. Provide expansion joints where moving joints in substrate occur.
D. Patch exposed anchor points to match color and texture of unit.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SUBJECT: SECTION 04810- UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 04810
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).

2. Mortar and grout.
3. Reinforcing steel.
4. Masonry joint reinforcement.
5. Ties and anchors.
6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Fire-stop Systems" for fire-stopping at openings in

masonry walls.
2. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistive joint systems at heads of
masonry walls.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed
under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1. Steel shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
E. Allowances: The following are included under the allowances indicated as specified in Division 1
Section "Allowances":
1. Source quality-control and field quality-control testing under Testing and Inspecting Allowance.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 04810– UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 1 / 14
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.
B. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive
strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with
ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced
walls.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Accessories embedded in masonry.
D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with
manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source
of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for
mortar and grout and source of aggregates.
1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes
approval of deviations from the contract documents unless such deviations are specifically
brought to the attention of architect and approved in writing.
E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with

requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for
each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.

3. Pre-blended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Joint reinforcement.
7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification.
2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive
strength requirement.
G. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and
mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar
type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
H. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to

comply with cold-weather requirements.
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a
uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single
manufacturer for each product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color
for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one
source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting
agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements"
for mockups.
1. Build sample panels for interior walls in sizes approximately (1200 mm) long by (1200 mm)
high by full thickness.
2. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
3. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of
mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of
workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in
writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the contract
documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved
by architect in writing.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects [and set quality standards for materials and execution].
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on drawings.

2. Build mockups for typical interior walls in sizes approximately (1800 mm) long by (1800) high by
full thickness, including face and backup and accessories.
3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.

4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar
and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of
workmanship.
a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically
approved by architect in writing.
b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the contract
documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by
architect in writing.
5. Approved mockups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of
substantial completion.
F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed
location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet,
do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and
oil.
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections with waterproof sheeting
at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 600 mm down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3
days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed
or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings
on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes,
from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by
freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 4 deg C
and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing
cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI

530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard.
B. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by
more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed work or will impair the quality of
completed masonry.
2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding,
and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2150 psi (14.8 MPa).
2. Weight Classification: Lightweight
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:
a. 100 mm nominal mm actual.

b. 150 mm nominal mm actual.
c. 200 mm nominal mm actual.
4. Retain subparagraph below if direct application of plaster is used.

5. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster,
provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
2.4 CONCRETE LINTELS
A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying with
requirements below.
B. Concrete Lintels: Precast units made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, texture,
and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated.
Cure precast lintels by same method used for concrete masonry units.
C. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207 Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I
or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 6.5 mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16
(1.18-mm) sieve.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Water: Potable.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
1. Interior Walls: Mill galvanized, carbon steel.

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 3.8-mm diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 3.8-mm diameter.
4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 407 mm c/c.
5. Provide in lengths of not less than 3 m.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of
side rods.
C. Cell-Reinforcement
1. Comply with drawing No. A662 and the Structural detail drawings.
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials
that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2
coating.
3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 316.
4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating.
5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
6. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
7. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
8. Stainless Steel bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM a 666, Type 304.
B. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide with corrugations having a
wavelength of 7.6 to 12.7 mm and an amplitude of 1.5 to 2.5 mm made from steel sheet, galvanized
after fabrication not less than 1.1 mm thick.
C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 100 mm wide.
1. Wire: Fabricate from 4.8-mm diameter, Mill-galvanized.
D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped (6.4-mm-) diameter, Mill-galvanized wire
may be used at interior walls, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within (25 mm) of
masonry face, made from (4.8-mm-) diameter, Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior
walls, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Connector Section for Concrete: To be in accordance with details shown on drawing No. A-662
4. Tie Section for Concrete: Corrugated metal ties with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots
in concrete and sized to extend to within (25 mm) of masonry face.
E. Partition Top anchors: (2.5-mm-) thick metal plate with (10-mm-) diameter metal rod (150 mm) long
welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of
tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. All to be in accordance with details
shown on drawing No. A-662
F. Rigid Anchors: Weld to steel or fix by expanded anchors to concrete a 100 x 100 x 6mm x 254mm
long (or as sized on the detail) Galvanized Steel clip angle in accordance with details shown on
drawing A-662.
1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
G. Stone Anchors: Fabricate dowels, cramps, and other stone anchors from stainless steel.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.
B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from
(0.9-mm), galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with
(ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
D. Post installed Anchors: Provide torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit
masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
2. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with (ASTM F 738M and
ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304
or 316, for anchors.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible
up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane.
B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No.
15 asphalt felt).
C. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit
cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from (3.6-mm) steel
wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed
for number of bars indicated.
2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,
water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement, mortar cement, and lime.
3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to Portland
cement, mortar cement, and lime.
4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,
regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following
types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
2. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.

3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications
where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply
with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour
height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing
indicated below:
1. Payment for these services will be made from Testing and Inspecting Allowance, as authorized
by Change Orders.
2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 140.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build single-leaf walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment,
complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to
fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces
and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds (30 g/194 sq. cm) per
minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time
of laying.
G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion
and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than (3 mm in 3 m), (6 mm in 6 m), or (12
mm) maximum.
2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than (6 mm in 3
m), or (12 mm) maximum.
3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from
level by more than (3 mm in 3 m), (6 mm in 6 m), or (12 mm) maximum.
4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus (3
mm), with a maximum thickness limited to (12 mm). Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of
adjacent courses by more than (3 mm).
5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus (3
mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than (3 mm).
6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than
(1.5 mm) except due to warping of masonry units within tolerances specified for warping of
units.
7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by
more than (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses
and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-
than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than
100-mm. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than
nominal 100-mm horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course
below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove
loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in
solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath,
wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 600 mm under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure
above, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of
CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 13-
mm clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 1200 mm o.c.,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or
metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final
position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to
comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint),
unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of (16 mm) on
exterior side of walls, (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than (406 mm) c/c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than (203 mm) c/c in foundation walls and parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending
(305 mm) beyond openings.
a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets,
column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
F. Comply with detail shown on drawing No. A-662 and structural detail drawings.
3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply
with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than (25 mm) in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise indicated on drawing A-662. Keep open space free of mortar and
other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached
to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated on drawing A-662, but not more than (610 mm) c/c. vertically and
(915 mm) c/c horizontally.
3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not
allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or
partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using the following method:

1. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep
head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant and filler. Ensure
both filler and sealant to have fire-stopping system at rated walls to match wall rating. Refer to
drawing A-662
C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible
filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants," but not less than (10 mm).
1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.
3.8 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 610 mm for block-size units
are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 200 mm at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated.
Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support
forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently
to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during
construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength
to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than (1520 mm).
A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare
reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections.
1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes,
and locations of reinforcement.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
C. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for
compressive strength.
D. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
3.11 PARGING
A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total
thickness of (19 mm). Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to ensure full bond
to subsequent coat.
B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of
(3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.
C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.
3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or
that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar,
pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill
with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat,
uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins
and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or
chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel un-cleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with
cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them
with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.
6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of
stain on exposed surfaces.
8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions.
9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."
3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material
as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than (100 mm) in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry
waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within (450 mm) of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
SUBJECT: SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Structural steel.
2. Architecturally exposed structural steel.
3. Prefabricated building columns.
4. Grout.
1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and
administrative requirements.
2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for [steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to
structural-steel frame] [miscellaneous steel fabrications] [and] [other metal items] not
defined as structural steel.
4. [Division 9 painting Sections] [and] [Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings"] for
surface preparation and priming requirements.
5. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for structural steel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.
B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural steel designated as architecturally exposed

structural steel in the contract documents.
A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the contract documents to be
selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand LRFD loads and comply with other
information and restrictions indicated.
1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel
Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design," Volume 2, Part 9.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 05120 – STRUCTURAL STEEL 1 / 12

2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional

engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural-steel connections.
B. Construction: Type [PR, partially] [FR, fully] restrained.
C. Construction: Type [1, rigid frame] [2, simple framing] [3, semi rigid framing].
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show
size, length, and type of each weld.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify
pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
5. For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data prepared by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Qualification Data: For [Installer] [fabricator] [professional engineer] [testing agency].
E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with
requirements:
1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties.

2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
3. Direct-tension indicators.
4. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
5. Shear stud connectors.
6. Shop primers.
7. Non shrink grout.
F. Source quality-control test reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program
and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category [CASE] [CSE].
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category [Cbd] [Sbd].
C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement [P1] [P2]
[P3] or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2."
3. AISC's Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."
4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections."
5. AISC's Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members]"
6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
F. Mockups: Build mockups of architecturally exposed structural steel to set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
1. Coordinate finish painting requirements with Division 9 painting Sections.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Project Management and Coordination."
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground
and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or
rusty before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload
to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the
Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: [ASTM A 992/A 992M] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)] [ASTM A 529/A 529M,
Grade 50 (345)] [ASTM A 913/A 913M, Grade 50 (345)].
B. Channels, Angles, [M], [S]-Shapes: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)]
[ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 (345)] [ASTM A 913/A 913M, Grade 50 (345)].
C. Plate and Bar: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)] [ASTM A 529/A 529M,
Grade 50 (345)].
D. Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50 (345).

E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade [B] [C], structural tubing.
F. Corrosion-Resisting Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 847, structural tubing.
G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Weight Class: [Standard] [Extra strong] [Double-extra strong].

2. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.
H. Medium-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 65-35 (Grade 450-240), carbon steel.
I. High-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 148/A 148M, Grade 80-50 (Grade 550-345), carbon or alloy
steel.
J. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436
(ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: [Plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically deposited
zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50].
2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8,) compressible-
washer type.
a. Finish: [Plain] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50]
[Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50, baked epoxy coated].
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel
structural bolts [or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends]; ASTM A 563
(ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel
washers, plain.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M,) Type 10.9, compressible-
washer type, plain.
C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, [heavy hex]

[round] head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-
steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: [Plain] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50].
D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon
steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.
E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable]
[ASTM A 354] [ASTM A 449] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)] [ASTM A 36/A 36M]
[ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6)].
1. Configuration: [Straight] [Hooked].

2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) [heavy] hex carbon steel.

3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.
F. Headed Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable] [ASTM A 354]
[ASTM A 449] [ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6)], straight.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.
G. Threaded Rods: [ASTM A 193/A 193M] [ASTM A 354] [ASTM A 449] [A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)]
[ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6)].

2. Washers: [ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened] [ASTM A 36/A 36M] carbon steel.
H. [Clevises] [Turnbuckles]: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold-finished carbon steel.
I. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel.
J. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel.
2.3 PRIMER
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type [I] [II], iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd.
B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type [I] [II], iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd.
C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.
D. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, non asphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: [MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20] [ASTM A 780].
2.4 GROUT
A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404, Size
No. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for
placement and hydration.
B. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed
with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate

grout, noncorrosive, non staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-
minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to
AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's Load and Resistance
Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until
structural steel has been erected.
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming
operations.
B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance
limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel
identified as architecturally exposed structural steel.
1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting,
rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.
2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and
shop priming.
C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.
D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal
surfaces.
E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to [SSPC-SP 1,
"Solvent Cleaning] [SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning] [SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning]."
G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
H. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing
to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members
in completed wall framing.
I. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel. Weld exposed joints
continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to
frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10
inches (250 mm) c/c, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work
through steel framing members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. [Do not thermally cut bolt holes or
enlarge holes by burning.]
2. Base-Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel
surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: [Snug tightened] [Pretensioned] [Slip critical].
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for
mill material.
3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed
structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. [Prevent weld show-through on
exposed steel surfaces.]
a. Grind butt welds flush.

b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.
2.7 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
A. General: Prefabricated building columns consisting of load-bearing structural-steel members encased in

manufacturer's standard insulating concrete for fire protection and enclosed in an outer non-load-
bearing steel shell.
1. Concrete Fill: Manufacturer's standard-mix structural concrete, with a minimum 28-day

compressive strength of 5000 psi (34.5 MPa), machine mixed and mechanically vibrated during
placement to produce concrete fill free of voids.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide prefabricated building column listed and labeled by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings indicated, based
on testing according to ASTM E 119.
1. Fire-Resistance Rating: [4] [3] [2] hours.
C. Column Configuration: Provide columns of sizes and shapes indicated. Fabricate connections to
comply with details shown or as required to suit type of structure indicated.
D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering prefabricated

building columns that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prefabricated building columns by one
of the following:
1. Black Rock Column, Inc.

2. Dean, George H. Inc.
3. Fire-Trol Division; Dean Lally L.P.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a

depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag,
or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
3. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning."
4. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
5. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning."
6. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
7. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."
8. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
9. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning."
C. Priming: after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at
rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use
priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color
of second coat to distinguish it from first.
D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, non asphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System
Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
2.9 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to
ASTM A 123/ A 123M.
1. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing.

2. Galvanize lintels & shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or
produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract
Documents.
C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and
inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to
requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-
degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear
connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing
plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel
secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to
design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing
are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place
concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Load and Resistance Factor Design
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."

B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials,
and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and
bearing plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before
packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids
remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow curing. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances for all structural steel including any architecturally exposed structural steel
within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent
contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations
and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature
when structure is completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and
grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by the architect. Finish thermally cut
sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1.
H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
I. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: [Snug tightened] [Pretensioned] [Slip critical].
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and Load and
Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" for bearing, adequacy of
temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for
mill material.
4. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed
structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show-through on
exposed steel surfaces.
a. Grind butt welds flush.

b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds.
3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC's Load and Resistance Factor Design
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements
of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire-resistance rating indicated.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect
field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.
1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following
inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than- continuous 360-degree flash or
welding repairs to any shear connector.
2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already
tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1.
E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract
Documents.

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections,
rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting
structural steel.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool

cleaning.
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

SUBJECT: SECTION 07135- EPDM MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
SECTION 07135
EPDM MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
(PRE-INJECTABLE WATER PROOFING SYSTEM)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
The PIS 150 system incorporates minimum 1.5mm (60mil) thick Sure Seal, black, non reinforced EPDM
membrane for horizontal grade and Sure Seal Fleece Backed EPDM 2.92mm (EPDM 1.52mm and Fleece
1.4mm) for vertical grade in conjunction with Flexible Fast pre injected organic materials.
A. The Sure-Seal 1.5 mm (.060”) thick minimum, non-reinforced EPDM membrane meets ASTM D6134-97,
Standard Specification for Vulcanized Rubber Sheets Used in Waterproofing Systems.
Tensile Strength ASTM D412, Die C
Elongation, Ultimate ASTM D412, Die C
Tensile Set ASTM D412, Method A, Die C, % Elongation
Tear Resistance ASTM D624, Die C
Brittleness Temperature ASTM D746
Linear Dimensional Change ASTM D1204, 166 h @ 240º F ± 4º F
Water Absorption ASTM D471, @ 70º C ± 2º C (158º F ± 4º F) for 166 h
Factory Seam Strength ASTM D816, Modified Method B, 1” wide, 2”/min.
Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E96, Procedure B W relative humidity of 45% @
70º F ± 4º F
Hardness Durometer A ASTM D2240
Resistance to Soil Burial ASTM D3083
Resistance to Heat Aging ASTM D573, Properties after 166 h @ 240º F ± 4º F
Test Resistance to Puncture ASTM E154
B. The Sure Seal FLeeceBack EPDM membrane 2.92mm thick meets the requirement of ASTM D4637 type
III.
C. This Underground Tanking System must be installed by an Authorized Applicator and in compliance with
Carlisle’s installation details and project specification as approved by Carlisle Deviations from Carlisle's details
or approved specification shall be secured in writing prior to commencement of work.
D. Prior to installation, project shop drawings may be submitted to the manufacturer for review and approval.
Copies of the approved shop drawing should be made available to the project architect/engineer upon
request.
E. Comply with applicable regulatory requirements and applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and laws.
1.03 EXTENT OF WORK
A. Provide all labor, material, tools, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete the installation of the
Fast Flexible and a 0.060 inch thick minimum non-reinforced EPDM membrane Pre-Injected Tanking System
including all accessories and equipment as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings in accordance
with the manufacturer's most current specifications and details.
B. The waterproofing contractor shall be fully knowledgeable of all requirements of the contract documents
and shall make themselves aware of all job site conditions that will affect their work.
C. The waterproofing contractor shall confirm all given information and advice the building owner, prior to bid,
of any conflicts that will affect their cost proposal.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION - 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 07135 – EPDM MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 1/8
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to starting work, the waterproofing contractor must submit the following:
1. Shop drawings showing layout, details of construction and identification of materials.
2. Submit a letter of certification from the manufacturer that certifies the waterproofing contractor is
authorized to install the manufacturer's waterproofing system and lists foremen who have received
training from the manufacturer along with the dates training was received.
B. Upon completion of the installed work, submit copies of the manufacturer's final inspection to the specifier.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers or wrappings with the
manufacturer's name, brand name and installation instructions intact and legible. Deliver in sufficient quantity
to permit work to continue without interruption.
B. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for proper material storage.
1. Store materials, except membrane, between 60°F and 80°F in dry areas protected from water and
direct sunlight. If exposed to lower temperature, restore to 60°F minimum temperature before using.
2. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well-ventilated spaces with proper fire and safety
precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life.
C. Any materials that are found to be damaged shall be removed and replaced at the applicator's expense.
1.06 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on completed sections. Care should be
exercised to provide protection for the interior of the building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any
completed sections of the membrane system.
B. Do not disrupt activities in occupied spaces.
1.07 USE OF THE PREMISES
A. Before beginning work, the waterproofing contractor must secure approval from the building owner's
representative for the following:
1. Areas permitted for personnel parking.
2. Access to the site.
3. Areas permitted for storage of materials and debris.
4. Areas permitted for the location of cranes, hoists and chutes for loading and unloading materials to
and from the working area.
1.08 EXISTING CONDITIONS
If discrepancies are discovered between the existing conditions and those noted on the drawings, immediately
notify the owner's representative by phone and solicit the manufacturer's approval prior to commencing with
the work. Necessary steps shall be taken to make the building watertight until the discrepancies are resolved.
1.09 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
A. Temporary Utilities:
1. Water, power for construction purposes and lighting are available at the site and will be made
available to the waterproofing contractor.
2. Provide all hoses, valves and connections for water from source designated by the owner when made
available.
3. When available, electrical power should be extended as required from the source. Provide all trailers,
connections and fused disconnects.
B. Building Site:
1. The waterproofing contractor shall use reasonable care and responsibility to protect the building and
site against damages. The contractor shall be responsible for the correction of any damage incurred
as a result of the performance of the contract.
2. The waterproofing contractor shall remove all debris from the job site in a timely and legally
acceptable manner so as to not detract from the aesthetics or the functions of the building.
C. Security:
Obey the owner's requirements for personnel identification, inspection and other security measures.
1.10 JOB SITE PROTECTION
A. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire extinguishers.
B. Store moisture susceptible materials above ground and protect with waterproof coverings.
C. Remove all traces of piled bulk materials and return the job site to its original condition upon completion of
the work.
1.11 SAFETY
The waterproofing contractor shall be responsible for all means and methods as they relate to safety and shall
comply with all applicable local, state and federal requirements that are safety related. Safety shall be the
responsibility of the waterproofing contractor. All related personnel shall be instructed daily to be mindful of
the full time requirement to maintain a safe environment for the facility's occupants including staff, visitors,
customers and the occurrence of the general public on or near the site.
1.12 WORKMANSHIP
A. Applicators installing system work shall be factory trained and approved by the manufacturer they are
representing.
B. All work shall be of highest quality and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications
and to the building owner's satisfaction.
C. There shall be a supervisor on the job site at all times while work is in progress.
A. The manufacturer must have a minimum of 20 years experience in the manufacturing of vulcanized thermal
set sheeting.
B. Unless otherwise noted in this specification, the waterproofing contractor must strictly comply with the
manufacturer's current specifications and details.
C. Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this type of work who is skilled in
the application techniques of the materials specified. Provide at least one thoroughly trained and experienced
superintendent on the job at all times waterproofing work is in progress.
D. There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop drawings without the prior
written approval of the specifier. Any deviation from the manufacturer's installation procedures must be
supported by a written certification on the manufacturer's letterhead and presented for the specifier's
consideration.
E. Upon completion of the installation, the applicator shall arrange for an inspection to be made by a non
sales technical representative of the membrane manufacturer in order to determine whether or not corrective
work will be required before the delivery of works.
1.14 JOB CONDITIONS, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
A. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) should be on location at all times during the transportation, storage
and application of materials.
B. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all fields splices away from low spots and out
of outlets. All field splices should be shingled to prevent bucking of water.
C. When loading materials onto site, the Carlisle Authorized Waterproofing Applicator must comply with the
requirements of the building owner to prevent overloading.
D. Proceed with waterproofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
E. The surface on which the waterproofing membrane is to be applied shall be clean, smooth, dry, and free of
projections or contaminants that would prevent proper application of or be incompatible with the new
installation, such as fins, sharp edges, foreign materials, oil and grease.
F. Contaminants such as grease fats and oils shall not be allowed to come in direct contact with the
waterproofing membrane.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All components of the specified waterproofing system shall be products of Carlisle SynTec Incorporated or
accepted by Carlisle SynTec Incorporated as compatible.
B. Unless otherwise approved by the specifier and accepted by the membrane manufacturer, all products
must be manufactured and supplied by the waterproofing system manufacturer and covered by the warranty.
2.02 MEMBRANE
A. Sure-Seal (black) 1.5 mm (.060”) thick minimum non-reinforced EPDM (Ethylene, Propylene, Diene
Terpolymer) membrane; maximum 15.2 m (50') wide, maximum 30.5 m (100') long which meets ASTM
D6134-97.
1.5mm THICK NON-REINFORCED EPDM MEMBRANE
Physical Property Test Method Typical

Tolerance on Nominal Thickness, % ASTM D 412 +/-10
Tensile Strength, min, psi (MPa) ASTM D 412 1630 (11.2)
Elongation, Ultimate, min, % ASTM D 412 520
Tear Resistance, min, lbf/in (kN/m) ASTM D 624
(Die C) 230 (40.3)
Factory Seam Strength, min. Modified
ASTM D 816 Membranes
Rupture
Resistance to Heat Aging* ASTM D 573
Properties after 4 weeks @ 240deg F (116deg C)
Tensile Strength, min, psi (MPa) ASTM D 412 1500 (10.3)
Tear Resistance, min, lbf/in (kN/m) ASTM D 624 215 (37.6)
Linear Dimensional Change, max, % ASTM D 1204 -0.4
Ozone Resistance*
Condition after exposure to 100 pphm
Ozone in air for 168 hours @ 104deg_F (40deg C) ASTM D 1149 No Cracks
Specimen is at 50% strain
Brittleness Temp., max, deg. F (deg. C)* ASTM D 746 -85 (-65)
Resistance to Water Absorption*
After 7 days immersion @ 158deg_F (70deg_C) ASTM D 471 +2.0

Change in mass, max, %
Water Vapor Permeance* ASTM E 96

max, perm (Proc. B or BW) .05
Resistance to Outdoor (Ultraviolet) Weathering*

Xenon-Arc, 7560 kJ/m2 total radiant exposure at .70 W/m ASTM D G-26 No Cracks
irradiance, 176 _F (80º C) black panel temp. No Crazing
2.92mm THICK FLEECEBACK MEMBRANE
Physical Property Test Method Typical
Tolerance on Nominal Thickness, % ASTM D 751 ± 10

Thickness over Fleece, min, in. (mm) ASTM D4637
Annex .060 (1.524)
Weight 1b/ft2 (kg/m2) 0.42 (2.1)
Breaking Strength, min, lbf (N) ASTM D751 Grab
Method 200 (890)
Tearing Strength, min, lbf (N) ASTM D 751 B
Tongue Tear 45 (200)
Brittleness point, max, °F (°C) ASTM D 2137 -67 (-55)
Resistance to Heat Aging Properties after 4 weeks ASTM D 573

@ 240°F (116°C) for Sure-Seal Breaking Strength, ASTM D 751 200 (890)
min, lbf (N) Elongation, Ultimate, min, % Linear ASTM D 412 225
Dimensional Change, max, % ASTM D 1204 -0.7
Ozone Resistance Condition after exposure to 100

pphm Ozone in air for 168 hours @ 104°F (40°C) ASTM D 1149 No Cracks
Specimen wrapped around 3 inch (7.5 cm) mandrel
Resistance to Water Absorption After 7 days

immersion @ 158°F (70°C) Change in mass, max, % ASTM D 471 +2.0
Resistance to Outdoor (Ultraviolet) Weathering

Xenon-Arc, 7560 kJ/m2 total radiant exposure at 0.70 ASTM G 155 No Cracks
W/m2, 176°F (80°C) black panel temperature No Crazing
Fabric Adhesion (lbf/in.)

Machine Direction 77ºF ASTM D413 4.5
Puncture Resistance (lbf) ASTM D120 22
2.03 PRE-INJECTED MATERIAL
A. Flexible Fast: a two components blue organic material sprayed using Mobile Spray Rig. Flexible Fast
typical properties and characteristics
BASE PART A PART B
Mixing ratios by volume 1:1 Part A to Part B
Viscosity (CPS @ 25º C) 400 700

MDI content 23%
Average Net weight 10.25 Lbs/gal 8.75 Lbs/gal
Packaging 15 Gal-drum (57 L) 15 Gal-drum (57 L)
50 Gal-drum (190 L) 50 Gal-drum (190 L)
Shelf Life 6 month 6 months*
Temperature requirements
(Substrate & ambient) Min. 25º F (Heated equipment)
Min. 60º F (Unheated equipment)
*Can be extended to one year by adding FAST catalyst after six months.
PHYSICAL PROPERTY TEST METHOD RESULTS
Elongation ASTM D412 150%

Modulus at 150% elongation ASTM D412 20psi
2.04 CLEANERS, PRIMERS, SEALANT & TAPES
A. Sure-Seal SecurTAPE™: A 15.6 cm (6 inch) wide by 30.5 m (100 foot) long splice tape used
to splice adjoining sheets together.
B. Sure-Seal HP-250 Primer: A solvent-based primer used to prepare the surface of EPDM
membrane for application of Splice Tape or Pressure-Sensitive products. This Primer can
also be used in conjunction with EP-95 Splicing Cement in lieu of Splice Cleaner or
Weathered Membrane Cleaner.
C. Water Cut-Off Mastic: A one-component, low viscosity, self-wetting, Butyl blend mastic used
as a sealing agent between the EPDM membrane or Elastoform® Flashing and applicable
substrates.
D. CCW-201 Sealant: A multi-component, chemical curing, low modulus, non-sag, polyurethane
sealant specially formulated for dynamically moving joints. The sealant is used at all
expansion joints and at the ase of walls in conjunction with CCW 500 Hot Rubberized Asphalt
and CCW-525 (Cold Applied) Liquid Waterproofing Membranes in high water table conditions
and is designed to provide long term performance +50% movement capability and excellent
weathering characteristics.
E. Sure Board: Polypropylene protection board 6mm thick.
2.05 FLASHING
A. Pressure Sensitive Elastoform Flashing: A nominal 60-mil (1.5mm) thick, uncured, EPDM membrane
laminated to a nominal 35-mil (0.89 mm) thick, fully cured pressure-sensitive adhesive.
2.06 MEMBRANE TERMINATIONS
A. Sure-Seal Termination Bar: a 1 inch wide and .098 inch thick extruded aluminum bar pre-punched 6 inches
on center; incorporates a sealant ledge to support Lap Sealant and provide increased stability for membrane
terminations.
2.07 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene sheet 300 micron.

B. Sure-Board, Extruded Polypropylene Copolymer, 6mm thick as protection board for buried walls membrane
protection.
C. Metal flashing (if required) and miscellaneous items needed to fulfill the project requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the manufacturer's published instructions for the installation of the membrane waterproofing
system including proper substrate preparation, job site considerations and weather restrictions.
B. Position sheets to accommodate contours of the blinding area and shingle splices to avoid bucking water.
3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. On horizontal applications, new concrete blinding shall be relatively even and water cured, with a light hair
broom finish and in place for a minimum of 72 hours.
B. Sweep all loose debris from the concrete blinding tanking substrate prior to application of waterproofing
membrane.
C. Grind or fill surface at cold joints where each concrete pour is at a different plane to provide a smooth and
level surface.
D. All surfaces shall be structurally sound, dry and free of dust, dirt and frost. Non-approved curing agents or
other contaminates that may affect adhesion of the membrane must also be removed.
3.03 PRE-INJECTED APPLICATION
A. Flexible FAST is sprayed using Mobile Spray Rig to deliver the two components to a mixing spray gun for
distribution onto the substrate. Parts A & B are mixed in the gun and applied to the structure. A catalytic
reaction takes place, causing the Flexible FAST a smooth foam look on the surface.
3.04 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT
A. When the Flexible Fast is Tacky, Sure-Seal EPDM membrane is laid into the Blue Foam after developing
string/body and rolled with a weighted roller to ensure uniform surface distribution of work.
B. Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges approximately 7 inches.
C. Unroll and loose lay the protective mat, Polyethylene sheet 300 micron (minimum) on top of Sure Seal
EPDM Membrane.
3.05 MENBRANE INSPECTION & REPAIR
A. Inspect the membrane surface for carry cut, showing Blue color of pre-injected material as indicator.
B. Clean and primed damage area with Sure-Seal HP-250 primer.
C. Install a new patch of Sure-Seal EPDM membrane over damage area.
3.06 MEMBRANE SPLICING
A. Overlap adjacent sheets and mark a line 1/2 inch out from the top sheet.
B. Fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area (minimum 2-1/2 inches wide) of both membrane
sheets with Sure-Seal Primer as required by the membrane manufacturer.
C. Apply Splice Tape to bottom sheet with the edge of the release paper along the marked line. Press tape
onto the sheet using hand pressure. Overlap tape roll ends a minimum of 1 inch.
D. Remove the release paper and press the top sheet onto the tape using hand pressure.
E. Roll the seam toward the splice edge with a 2 inch wide steel roller.
F. Install a 6 inch wide section of Pressure-Sensitive Flashing over all overlaps.
3.07 OVERLAP TEST
As per ASTM D4437 “Air Lance Test”, use a compressed air source, test all bonded seams using a minimum
50 psi (344.74 kPa) air supply directed through a 0.1875” (0.48cm) nozzle held within 2.00” (5.08cm) of the
seam edge.
Note: do not exceed 75psi (517.11kPa) or it may cause damage to the seam.
3.08 PENETRATION
For penetrations ask for the manufacturer shop drawings and recommendations.
3.09 HORIZONTAL PROTECTION
A. Install the Polyethylene 300 micron loose laid over the Sure-Seal EPDM and overlap adjoining sheets a
minimum of 15 cm (6 inches).
B. Cast non-reinforced protection concrete 50mm thick minimum on top of Polyethylene sheet 300 micron.
3.10 VERTICAL PROTECTION
The protection layer Sure-Board 6mm thick, must extend approximately 2 - 3 inches under the screed on each
side of the blinding.
3.11 DAILY SEAL
On phased interventions, a daily seal must be performed to temporarily close the membrane to prevent water
infiltration.
3.12 CLEAN UP
Perform daily clean up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the project site.
Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner.
END OF SECTION
SUBJECT: SECTION 07210 – BUILDING INSULATION
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Thermal insulation in exterior walls, ceilings, and roofs.
B. Acoustical insulation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems: Insulation that is part of the finish system
assembly.
B. Section 07260 - Vapor Retarders: Vapor retarders that are separate from insulation.
C. Section 07410 - Preformed Roof and Wall Panels: Insulation factory-installed in panels.
D. Section 07510 - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing: Roof insulation.
E. Section 07530 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Roof insulation.
F. Section 07550 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Roof insulation.
G. Section 15086 - Duct Insulation: Duct liner and duct wrap.
H. Section 15084 - Equipment Insulation: Insulation on mechanical equipment.
I. Section 15811 - Fibrous Glass Ducts.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method; 2000.
B. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of
the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 1998.
C. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2000a.
D. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing; 1998.
E. ASTM C 764 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation; 1999.
F. ASTM C 1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal
Insulation; 2000.
G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2000a.
H. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 07210 – BUILDING INSULATION 1/8
I. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
Degrees C; 1999.
J. NAIMA - Recommendations for Installation in Residential and Other Light-Frame Construction - Fiber
Glass Building Insulation; North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; 1999.
K. NAIMA - Recommendations for Installation in Residential and Other Light-Frame Construction - Fiber
Glass Loose Fill Insulation; North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; 1997.
L. TAPPI T 803 - Puncture Resistance of Container Board; TAPPI; 1999.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature describing the products to be used, showing
compliance with specified requirements; include installation instructions.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.
B. Label insulation packages to include material name, production date and/or product code.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Any local manufacturers or imported products.
B. Substitutions:
C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE
A. Exterior Stud Walls: Batt type.

1. R-Value: ______.
2. Vapor Retarder: FSK-25 facing.
3. Vapor Retarder: Kraft facing.
4. Vapor Retarder: Separate.
B. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Walls: Rigid board type applied to interior face.
1. R-Value: ________.
2. Vapor Retarder: FSK facing.
3. Vapor Retarder: ASJ facing.
C. Basement Walls:
1. R-Value: ______.
2. Type: Extra wide batt type applied to interior face.
3. Type: Batt type applied between furring strips.
D. Attic/Ceiling Rafters: Blown type.

1. R-Value: ______.
E. Roof Rafters, With No Covering: Batt type.

1. R-Value: ______.
2. Vapor Retarder: FSK-25 facing.
F. Floor Joists Over Crawl Space: Batt type.

1. R-Value: ______.
2. Vapor Retarder: FSK-25 facing, with facing up (on warm side).
3. Vapor Retarder: Kraft facing, with facing up (on warm side).
G. Cathedral Ceilings (Gypsum Board Covering): High density batt type.

1. R-Value: ______.
2. Vapor Retarder: Kraft facing.
3. Vapor Retarder: None.
H. Above Soffits: Batt type.

1. R-Value: ______.
I. Interior Partitions Indicated with STC Rating: Batt type.
J. Above Interior Ceilings: Batt type.

1. Thickness: _____.
K. Theater - On Exposed Ceilings and Walls Above 8 Feet (2440 mm) Above Floor Level: Black
acoustical insulation.
1. Type: Batt type.
2. Type: Board type.
3. Thickness: ________.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Rigid Board Insulation: Glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 612, Type 1A or 1B;
insulation exclusive of facing non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136; Knauf
Insulation Board.
1. R-value as indicated when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.
2. 1 Inch (25 mm) Thickness: R-value of 4.3.
3. 1-1/2 Inch (38 mm) Thickness: R-value of 6.5.
9. Size: Maximum sizes available, to avoid jointing to greatest extent possible.
10. Density: 2.25 lb/cu ft (36 kg/cu m) minimum.
14. Dimensional Stability: Linear shrinkage less than 0.3 percent.
15. Facing: None, unfaced.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread of 25, maximum smoke
developed of 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
b. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 1.00, when tested on 2 inch (50 mm) samples in
accordance with ASTM C 423.
16. Facing: Foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) vapor retarder faced.
b. Noise Reduction Coefficient of 3.0 pcf (48 kg/cu m) Density Product: 0.75, when tested
on 2 inch (50 mm) samples in accordance with ASTM C 423.
c. Noise Reduction Coefficient of 6.0 pcf (96 kg/cu m) Density Product: 0.60, when tested
d. Vapor Retarder Perm Rating: Maximum 0.02 perms (1.1 ng/(Pa s sq m)) when tested in
e. Puncture Resistance: 25, when tested in accordance with TAPPI T 803.
17. Facing: All service jacket (ASJ) vapor retarder faced.
b. Noise Reduction Coefficient of 3.0 pcf (48 kg/cu m) Density Product: 0.65, when tested
c. Noise Reduction Coefficient of 6.0 pcf (96 kg/cu m) Density Product: 0.50, when tested
d. Vapor Retarder Perm Rating: Maximum 0.02 perms (1.1 ng/(Pa s sq m)) when tested in
e. Puncture Resistance: 50, when tested in accordance with TAPPI T 803.
B. Foil-Faced Batt Insulation: Glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 665; insulation
exclusive of facing non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136; extra wide stapling
flanges.
2. 3-1/2 Inch (89 mm) Thickness: R-value of 11.
5. 10 Inch (254 mm) Thickness: R-value of 30.
8. Width for Metal Framing Application: Same as framing center to center dimension.
9. Width for Wood Framing Application: Maximum of 1 inch (25 mm) less than framing center to
center dimension.
10. Facing: Foil-scrim-kraft (FSK-25) vapor retarder faced; ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A;
non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
b. Vapor Retarder Perm Rating: Maximum 0.04 perms (2.3 ng/(Pa s sq m)) when tested in
11. Facing: Foil vapor retarder faced; ASTM C 665, Type III, Class B.
a. Vapor Retarder Perm Rating: Maximum 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/(Pa s sq m)) when tested in
12. VOC Emission: Low VOC emission certified by GreenGuard Environmental Institute.
C. Kraft Faced Batt Insulation: Glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type II, Class
C; insulation exclusive of facing non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136; extra
wide stapling flanges.
3. 3-1/2 Inch (89 mm) Thickness: R-value of 13 (high density).
center dimension.
16. Vapor Retarder Perm Rating: Maximum 1.0 perms (57 ng/(Pa s sq m)) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 96.
D. Unfaced Batt Insulation: Glass fiber thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, Class A;
non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
2. 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thickness: R-value of 3.
center dimension.
19. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread of 25, maximum smoke developed of
50, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
E. Extra Wide Batt Insulation for Surface Application: Glass fiber thermal insulation complying with
ASTM C 665; insulation exclusive of facing non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E
136; Knauf Basement Wall Insulation.
4. Width: 48 inches (1219 mm).
5. Width: 72 inches (1829 mm).
6. Facing: Foil vapor retarder faced; ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; non-combustible when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
7. Facing: White vinyl vapor retarder faced; ASTM C 665, Type II, Class A.
9. Vapor Retarder Perm Rating: Maximum 0.1 perms (5.7 ng/(Pa s sq m)) when tested in
F. Acoustical Batt Insulation: Glass fiber insulation complying with ASTM C 665; non-combustible when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 136; Knauf Quiet Therm.
2. Stud Walls and Rafter Spaces: Thickness to nominally fill cavity.
3. Over Ceilings: Minimum thickness of ______.
4. Facing: None, unfaced; ASTM C 665, Type I, Class A.

b. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 1.00, when tested on 2 inch (50 mm) samples in
5. Facing: Kraft paper faced; ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C; extra wide stapling flanges.
G. Black Acoustical Insulation: Glass fiber insulation with smooth black facing; insulation exclusive of
facing non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
1. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, Class A; Knauf Wall and Ceiling Liner M.
a. Noise Reduction Coefficient of 1.5 pcf (24 kg/cu m) Density Product: 0.90, when tested
b. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm), 1.5 lb/cu ft (24 kg/cu m) density.
c. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm), 1.0 lb/cu ft (16 kg/cu m) density.
d. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm), 1.5 lb/cu ft (24 kg/cu m) density.
e. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm), 2.0 lb/cu ft (32 kg/cu m) density.
f. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), 1.0 lb/cu ft (16 kg/cu m) density.
g. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), 1.5 lb/cu ft (24 kg/cu m) density.
h. Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm), 1.0 lb/cu ft (16 kg/cu m) density.
i. Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm), 1.5 lb/cu ft (24 kg/cu m) density.
2. Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type 1A or 1B; Knauf Black Acoustical Board.
a. Maximum Air Velocity In Plenums: 4000 ft/min (1219 m/min).
b. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm), 3.0 lb/cu ft (48 kg/cu m) density.
c. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), 3.0 lb/cu ft (48 kg/cu m) density.
d. Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm), 2.25 lb/cu ft (36 kg/cu m) density.
e. Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm), 3.0 lb/cu ft (48 kg/cu m) density.
4. Water Vapor Sorption: Less than 3 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C
1104.
H. Blown Insulation: Unbonded, virgin fibrous glass, for pneumatic placement, complying with ASTM C
764, Type I; non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136; Knauf Summit Fiber Glass
Blowing Insulation.
1. Installed Thickness in Open Applications: As required to achieve R-value of ____, based on
testing in accordance with ASTM C 518.
2. Closed Cavity Applications: Fill entire cavity full.
4. Critical Radiant Flux: Greater than 0.12 W/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E
970.
5. Color: White.
I. Accessory Materials and Fasteners: Provide all materials required for complete and proper
installation of insulation, whether specified or not.
J. Separate Vapor Retarders: As specified in Section 07260.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed.
B. Verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.
C. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been tested and inspected.
D. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section.
E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION - BATTS, BLANKETS, AND BOARDS
A. Install in accordance with NAIMA "Recommendations for Installation in Residential and Other
Light-Frame Construction - Fiber Glass Building Insulation" and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Surface Application: Apply insulation directly to surface with appropriate spindle or prong-type
anchors.
1. Fasten anchors to steel surfaces by welding the pin to metal or by using pre-attached heads and
welded through the insulation.
2. Fasten anchors to other substrates with adhesive. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for
surface preparation and adhesive pattern.
3. Impale insulation on anchor and secure with washer.
4. Select pin lengths to ensure tight fit. Protect pin tips where subject to human contact.
5. See manufacturer's diagram for impaling pin pattern.
C. Surface Application: Apply insulation with adhesive. Follow adhesive manufacturer's

recommendations for surface preparation and adhesive pattern.
D. Between Furring Strips, Hat-Channels, and Z-Shaped Furring: Install insulation between furring
members; use fastening system recommended by furring strip manufacturer.
E. Between Metal Studs, Rafters, and Joists: Friction fit insulation between framing members after
cover material has been installed on one side of the cavity.
1. Unfaced Insulation: In applications without a cover material and where framing depth is larger
than insulation thickness, use wire or metal straps to hold insulation in place.
2. Faced Insulation: Tape attachment flanges to face of metal framing prior to applying interior
finish.
3. Wall Heights Over 8 Feet (2440 mm) and Ceilings: Provide supplementary support to hold
insulation in place until finish surface is applied.
F. Between Wood Studs, Rafters, and Joists:

1. Unfaced Insulation: Friction fit insulation between framing members after cover material has
been installed on one side of cavity. In applications without a cover material, use wire or metal
straps to hold insulation in place.
2. Faced Insulation: Staple attachment flanges to face or side of framing member every 8 to 12
inches (200 to 305 mm) on verticals, every 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) on horizontals and
slopes.
3. Faced Insulation: Friction fit insulation between framing members after cover material has
been installed on one side of cavity. In applications without a cover material, use wire or metal
straps to hold insulation in place.
G. Between Open Web Bar Joists: Secure with 16 or 18 gage wire running diagonally or perpendicular
to insulation, spaced at 18 to 24 inches (460 to 610 mm).
H. Over Suspended Ceilings: Install insulation with face contacting back of ceiling panels; butt insulation
tightly together at edges to prevent thermal leaks.
I. Maintain vapor retarder integrity by tightly abutting adjacent insulation.
J. Repair punctures or tears in vapor retarder facing by taping. Follow tape manufacturer's application
recommendations.
K. Do not leave kraft or standard foil facings exposed.
3.3 INSTALLATION - BLOWN INSULATION
A. Install in accordance with NAIMA "Recommendations for Installation in Residential and Other
Light-Frame Construction - Fiber Glass Loose Fill Insulation" and manufacturer's instructions; follow
manufacturer's coverage chart.
B. In open applications, install to depth necessary to achieve specified R-value.
C. In closed cavities, install to fill entire cavity.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect insulation from damage and from becoming wet before, during and after installation.
SUBJECT: SECTION 07920- JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.

b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and
louvers.
c. Control and expansion joints in ceilings.
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Joints in stone paving units, including steps.
c. Joints between different materials listed above.
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors.
f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
c. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 07920 – JOINT SEALANTS 1 / 13

2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers
and gaskets.
3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated
construction.
4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
5. Division 8 Section "Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls" for structural and other glazing
sealants.
6. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints.
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint
seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint
sealants in (13 mm) wide joints formed between two (150 mm) long strips of material matching the
appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for interior sealants, including printed statement of
VOC content.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.
F. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant
Validation Program.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer.
H. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in
optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article.
I. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility
and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
J. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.

K. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a

qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
L. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation
of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing
indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint
preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims,
joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective
measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are
based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with,
joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from
a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period
preceding the commencement of the Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance
with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under
cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard
specifications and test methods.
E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by the architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify the architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative
present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure
for opposite side.
5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product
and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is
obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive
failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be
considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during
testing.
F. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under
sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution:
1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive
elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.
G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below (5 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant

manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply
with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants
from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2
articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-
applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications
for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be non-staining to

porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and
have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will be
continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for
Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is de-ionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food; provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

E. Sealant Type A:
1. For exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not limited
to:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between architectural precast concrete units.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Butt joints between metal panels.
e. Joints between marble and granite.
f. Joints between different materials listed above.
g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows,
storefronts, louvers and similar openings.
h. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
2. Provide single-component or multi-component, low-modulus, non-sag sealant; comply with
ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25.
3. Acceptable sealants:
a. Urethanes
1) Single Component
a) Vulkem 921
b) Dymonic
c) Tremflex 25
d) Vulkem 116
e) Vulkem 911
f) Vulkem 931
g) Or approved equal
2) Multi Component
a) Dymeric 511
b) Dymeric
c) Vulkem 227
d) Vulkem 922
e) Or approved equal
b. Silicones
1) Single Component
a) Spectrem 1
b) Spectrem 2
c) Spectrem 3
d) Or approved equal
F. Sealant Type B:
1. For interior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not limited
to:
b. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings.
c. Joints on precast beams and planks.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows,
storefronts, louvers, elevator entrances and similar openings.
e. Trim or finish joints subject to movement.
a. Single Component
1) Dymonic
2) Vulkem 116
3) Vulkem 921
4) Tremflex 25
5) Vulkem 911
6) Vulkem 931
7) Or approved equal
b. Multi Component
1) Dymeric 511

2) Vulkem 922
3) Vulkem 227
c. Silicone
1) Spectrem 1
2) Spectrem 2
3) Tremsil 600
4) Proglaze
5) Spectrem 3
d. Other
1) Tremflex 834
G. Sealant Type C:
1. For exterior and interior joints in horizontal and sloped traffic surfaces such as, but not limited
to:
a. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Control, expansion and isolation joints in structural precast concrete units.
c. Joints between architectural precast concrete paving units.
d. Tile control and expansion joints.
e. Joints between different materials listed above.
2. Provide single-component or multi-component polyurethane sealant having a Shore A
hardness of not less than 25 or more than 50 and plus-or-minus 25 percent joint movement
capability; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 25.
a. THC-900/901
b. Vulkem 245
c. Tremflex SL
d. Vulkem 45
e. Vulkem 227
f. Or approved equal
H. Sealant Type D:
1. For interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces requiring pick-resistant security sealant
such as, but not limited to:
b. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings.
c. Perimeter joints between concrete surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and
elevator entrances.
d. Trim or finish joints subject to minimal movement.
2. Provide a single-component or multi-component, non-sag polyurethane sealant having a Shore
A hardness of 55.
a. Vulkem 617
b. Or approved equal
I. Sealant Type E:
1. For exterior and interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces of potable water storage areas.
2. Provide single-component or multi-component polyurethane sealant certified by National
Sanitation Foundation as conforming to the requirements of NSF Standard 61-Drinking Water
System Components-Health Effects; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or NS,
Class 25; select color from the NSF listing.
a. Single Component
1) Vulkem 45
2) Vulkem 921

3) Dymonic
4) Or equal approved
b. Multi Component
1) Vulkem 245
J. Sealant Type H:
1. For exterior vertical joints in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems.
2. Provide a single-component or multi-component sealant; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or
M, Grade NS, Class 25, comply with EIMA 300.01.
3. Acceptable products:
a. Polyurethanes
1) Dymeric 511
2) Dymeric
3) Vulkem 922
b. Silicones
1) Spectrem 1
2) Spectrem 3
K. Sealant Type I:
1. For interior or exterior joints in vertical surfaces between laps in fabrications of sheet metal.
a. JS-773
b. Tremco Butyl Sealant
c. Tremco Acoustical Sealant
d. Or approved equal
L. Sealant Type J:
1. For exterior vertical joints under metal thresholds and saddles or as a bedding sealant for sheet
metal flashing and frames of metal or wood.
3. Polyurethanes
a. Vulkem 116
b. Dymonic
c. Vulkem 921
d. Tremflex 25
e. Vulkem 931
f. Vulkem 911
g. Or approved equal
4. Silicones
a. Spectrem 2
b. Proglaze
c. Spectrem 3
5. Other
a. JS-773
b. Tremco Butyl Sealant
c. Tremco Acoustical

2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, non-hardening, non-
skinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1. Products:
a. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant or approved equal.
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), O
(open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as
approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, non-absorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures
down to (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of
joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant
to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field
tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum
adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant
performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved
for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint
substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous
joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer,
based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not
allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint
seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions
indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and
backs of joints.
F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings
are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with
sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in
ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed
silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not
less than (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead (6 mm) inside masking tape.
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion
and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between
sealant and both extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints.
Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor
knife.
J. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing
protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends,
turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of
sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant
manufacturer's written instructions.

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first (300 m) of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant
and joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per
elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for
type of joint-sealant application indicated.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this
by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure
for opposite side.
3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with
specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.
4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes
sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed,
names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed,
adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant
dimensions.
6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures
used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new
sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants
that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed
applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which
joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or

deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so
installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

SUBJECT: SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS
SECTION 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS

(MPI Architectural Painting Manual)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Description:
1. Section Includes: All labor, materials, tools and other equipment, services and supervision
required to complete all exterior and interior painting and decorating work as indicated on Finish
Schedules and to the full extent of the drawings and specifications.
2. Works under this contract shall also include, but not necessarily be limited to:
a. High pressure washing and abrasive blasting in accordance with the requirements of
Section [insert appropriate specification section number].
b. Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of painting, including
cleaning, small crack repair, patching, caulking, and making good surfaces and areas to
the limits defined under MPI preparation requirements.
c. Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation in
accordance with MPI and wall covering manufacturer’s requirements.
d. Specific pre-treatments noted herein or specified in the MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual.
e. Priming (except where pre-primed with an approved primer under other Sections of work)
and painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, and ornamental metal and primed
steel equipment.
f. Priming and back-priming of wood materials as noted herein or specified in the MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
g. Painting of all semi concealed areas (e.g. inside of light troughs and valances, behind
grilles, and projecting edges above and below sight lines).
h. Painting of roof vent flashings in accordance with the requirements of Section 07600.
i. Stencil painting (e.g. locker numbers in tenant storage rooms).
j. Zone and traffic marking (e.g. parking lines and numbers, direction arrows, small car,
barrier free accessible and visitor parking bay designations, speed bump and pedestrian
walkway demarcation, overhead height restrictions, etc. on exterior (asphalt and/or
concrete) and interior (asphalt and/or concrete) surfaces except where such work is part
of asphalt or concrete paving specification work.
k. Painting and finishing of all exposed to view elevator equipment and components (i.e.
doors and door frames) unless pre-finished.
l. Painting of exposed to view mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing) services and
equipment, e.g., ducts, sprinkler piping, etc., and electrical work to extent noted on Finish
Schedule unless pre-finished.
m. Re-painting of existing surfaces and finishes when adjacent to new painting work where
applicable including surface preparation, prime and finish coats in accordance with MPI
Repainting requirements.
n. Provision of safe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary
ventilation supplied by others, where toxic and/or volatile / flammable materials are being
used.
3. Refer to drawings and schedules (e.g., Finish Schedule) for type, location and extent of finishes
required and includes all touch-ups and field painting necessary to complete work shown,
scheduled or specified.
4. This Section along with the drawings forms part of the Contract documents and are to be read,
interpreted and coordinated with all other parts, including.
MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2014 SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS 1 / 29
5. Division 0, Section 00700 - General Conditions and Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 - General Requirements form an integral part of this Section of Work. Painting
contractor shall refer to these and all other related parts.
1.2 Related Sections:
1. Unless otherwise noted, the following work or conditions are not included under this Section of
work:
NOTES:
1. Delete, revise or add to example selections listed below as required. Also list here any specific exclusion normally
assumed to be part of the painting work. Coordinate items with other Sections of Work in the Project Manual.
2. Work included in other sections may be indicated by listing appropriate sections as below:
Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls (temporary heat, lighting, scaffolds, etc.)
Section 01575 - Environmental Controls and Procedures (waste management and disposal)
Section 02740 - Asphalt Paving (traffic lines and markings)
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete (special finishes)
Section 04200 - Masonry (sealers over concrete or clay units)
Section 05120 - Structural Steel (shop primers and pre-finishing if applicable)
Section 05210 - Steel Joists (shop primers)
Section 05300 - Metal Decking (shop coatings)
Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications (shop primers and pre-finishing if applicable)
Section 05510 - Custom Metal work (shop primers and pre-finishing if applicable)
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry (priming and finishing)
Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork (priming and finishing)
Section 08210 - Wood Doors and Frames (pre-finishing)
Section 09720 - Wall Coverings
Section 09915 - Exterior Repainting
Section 09920 - Interior Repainting
Section 09970 - Electrostatic Painting
Section (03655) (09995) - Abrasive Blasting
Division 15 - Mechanical (painting, stenciling, banding of mechanical systems)
Division 16 - Electrical (painting, stenciling, banding of electrical systems)
3. Alternately, work included in other sections may be indicated by general statements as below:
a. Temporary heat and light, scaffolding and platforms, housekeeping services when
provided as specified under Section 01500.
b. Condition of substrates, correction of defects and deficiencies in substrates which may
adversely affect painting work, except for minimal work performed by this trade and
preparation of surfaces to receive paint and finishes under this section of work.
c. Abrasive blasting, shop cleaning, and shop priming including site touch-ups, and shop
painting when applicable, of structural steel, metal joists and decking, miscellaneous
metal, ornamental metal and steel equipment as specified under related Sections.
d. Removal of shop coatings, cleaning of surfaces and re-applying damaged and/or non-
conforming shop coats of paint, other than minimal spot touch-up.
e. Shop priming (and shop or pre-painting when applicable) of metal and wood doors,
frames and windows including fittings as specified under related Section.
f. Painting of copper, aluminum, stainless steel, nickel, bronze or brass surfaces, unless
otherwise specified herein.
g. Painting of materials and equipment off-site, e.g. pre-finishing millwork, etc.
h. Zone and traffic markings, e.g., parking bay lines and numbers, small car, barrier free
accessible and visitor parking bay designations, speed bumps, overhead height
restrictions, pedestrian walkway demarcation, etc. on interior (e.g. concrete) and exterior
(e.g. asphalt and/or concrete) surfaces as specified under Section.
i. Game line markings as specified under Section [insert appropriate section number].
j. Paint identification of equipment and services and hazards to safety.

k. Tenant improvement painting except for prime coat.
l. Applied finishes (e.g. wall fabrics) including surface preparation as specified under
Section [insert appropriate section number].
m. Re-painting of existing surfaces and finishes including surface preparation, prime and
finish coats in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual requirements (as specified under
Section).
n. Painting of mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing services and equipment) and
electrical work including color coding, stenciling and banding.
1.3 Pricing:
1. Provide Unit Prices for the following items and indicate same on appropriate Bid Form page.
a. For painting of gypsum board (wall) surfaces including surface preparation using
Premium Grade INT 9.2A, Latex with G3 (eggshell) finish, based on cost per square
[meter] [foot].
2. Provide Separate Prices for the following items and indicate same on appropriate Bid Form page.
a. For surface preparation and prime coat for specified wall fabric.
3. Provide Alternative Prices for the following items and indicate same on appropriate Bid Form
page.
a. For painting of wall surfaces including surface preparation, prime and finish coats in lieu
of wall fabric preparation and installation.
b. For painting of all wood doors and wood frames where applicable in lieu of pre-finishing
doors and frames in accordance with the requirements of related Section.
1.4 References:
1. The latest edition of the following reference standards shall govern all painting work:
a. Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MPI),

including Identifiers, Evaluation, Systems, Preparation and Approved Product List.
(Hereafter referred to as the MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the local MPI Accredited
Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.
b. Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer
Products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings) of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA).
c. National Fire Code of Canada.
1.5 Quality Assurance:
1. This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall
show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
throughout the duration of the work. When requested, Contractor shall provide a list of the last
three comparable jobs including, name and location, specifying authority / project manager, start /
completion dates and value of the painting work.
2. Only qualified journeypersons, as defined by local jurisdiction shall be engaged in painting and
decorating work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work under the direct supervision
of a qualified journeyperson in accordance with trade regulations.
3. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirements of the latest edition of
the Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MPI) (hereafter
referred to as the MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance
Association having jurisdiction.
4. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the Approved Product List
section of the MPI Painting Manual.
5. All painting and decorating work shall be inspected by a Paint Inspection Agency (inspector)
acceptable to the specifying authority and the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance
Association. The painting contractor shall notify the Paint Inspection Agency a minimum of one
week prior to commencement of work and provide a copy of the project painting specification,
plans and elevation drawings (including pertinent details) as well as a Finish Schedule.
6. All surfaces requiring painting shall be inspected by the Paint Inspection Agency who shall
notify the Consultant and General Contractor in writing of any defects or problems, prior to
commencing painting work, or after the prime coat shows defects in the substrate.
7. Where “special” painting, coating or decorating system applications (i.e. non-MPI listed products
or systems) are to be used, the paint or coating manufacturer shall provide as part of this work,
certification of all surfaces and conditions for specific paint or coating system application as well
as on site supervision, inspection and approval of their paint or coating system application as
required at no additional cost to the Owner.
8. The painting contractor shall receive written confirmation of the specific surface preparation
procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator / supplier to
ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat materials to be used before
painting any such work.
1.6 Regulatory Requirements:
1. Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by applicable
authorities having jurisdiction in regard to site safety (ladders, scaffolding, ventilation, etc.).
2. Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction in regard to the storage, mixing,
application and disposal of all paint and related waste materials. Refer to Waste Management
and Disposal.
3. Notify the Paint Inspection Agency on award of contract and make application for assignment of
an Inspector using appropriate forms supplied by the Agency as well as provide a copy of the
project painting specification, drawings, color schedule and list of proposed materials for review
purposes prior to commencement of work.
4. Fully cooperates at all times with the requirements of the Paint Inspection Agency in the
performance of their duties, including providing access and assistance as required to complete
inspection work.
1.7 Samples and Mock-Ups:
1. When requested by the Consultant or Paint Inspection Agency, provide duplicate minimum 300
mm (12”) square samples of surfaces or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified
paint or coating in colors, gloss / sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards
for review and approval. When approved, samples shall become acceptable standard of quality
for appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site.
2. When requested by the Consultant or Paint Inspection Agency, prepare and paint designated
surface, area, room or item (in each color scheme) to requirements specified herein, with
specified paint or coating showing selected colors, gloss / sheen, textures and workmanship to
MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room
and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-
site work.
1.8 Submittals:
1. All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals.
2. Submit consent of surety with Bid Submission as proof of ability to supply a 100% two (2) year
Maintenance Bond, if an MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s guarantee option is not
used.
3. If requested, submit a list of all painting materials to the Consultant and the Paint Inspection
Agency for review prior to ordering materials. If requested, provide an invoice list of all paint
materials ordered for project work to Paint Inspection Agency indicating manufacturer, types and
quantities for verification and compliance with specification and design requirements.
4. Submit two sets of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for
review and for posting at job site as required.
5. If requested, submit work schedule for various stages of work when painting occupied areas for
the Consultant’s review and Owner’s approval.
6. At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color
coding for all colors used for Owner’s later use in maintenance.
7. At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials as noted herein and
obtain a signed receipt.
1.9 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:
1. Deliver all painting materials in sealed, original labeled containers bearing manufacturer’s name,
brand name, type of paint or coating and color designation, standard compliance, materials
content as well as mixing and/or reducing and application requirements.
2. Store all paint materials in original labeled containers in a secure (lockable), dry, heated and well
ventilated single designated area meeting the minimum requirements of both paint manufacturer
and authorities having jurisdiction and at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 F (7 C). Only
the material had been used on this project are to be stored on site.
3. Where toxic and/or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate
fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no
smoking) as required.
4. Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous
combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire
hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated
containers and removed from the site on a daily basis.
5. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in regard to the use, handling,
storage and disposal of hazardous materials.
1.10 Scheduling:
1. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades.
2. Schedule painting operations in occupied facilities to prevent disruption of occupants in and about
the building. Painting shall be carried out [after facility working hours] [during silent hours] [on
weekends] in accordance with Owner’s operating requirements. Schedule work such that painted
surfaces will have dried before occupants are affected. Obtain written authorization from
Consultant / Owner for changes in work schedule.
1.11 Project / Site Requirements:
1. UNLESS specifically pre-approved by the specifying body, Paint Inspection Agency and the
applied product manufacturer, perform no painting or decorating work when the ambient air and
substrate temperatures are below 50 F (10 C) for both interior and exterior work.
2. Perform no exterior painting work unless environmental conditions are within MPI and paint
manufacturer’s requirements or until adequate weather protection is provided. Where required,
suitable weatherproof covering and sufficient heating facilities, it shall be in place to maintain
minimum ambient air and substrate temperatures for 24 hours before, during and after paint
application.
3. Perform no interior painting or decorating work unless adequate continuous ventilation and
sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above
minimum requirements for 24 hours before, during and after paint application. Provide
supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from existing system is
inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
4. Perform no painting or decorating work when the relative humidity is above 85% or when the dew
point is less than 5 F (3 C) variance between the air / surface temperature.
5. Perform no painting or decorating work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate
exceeds:
a. 15% for wood.

b. 12 % for plaster and gypsum board.
6. Conduct all moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test
concrete floors for moisture using a simple cover patch test.
7. Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
Note: Concrete and masonry surfaces must be installed at least 28 days prior to painting and decorating work and
must be visually dry on both sides.
8. Apply paint only to dry, clean, properly cured and adequately prepared surfaces in areas where
dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles will not affect
the quality of finished surfaces.
9. Perform no painting or decorating work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux (30 foot
candles) is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated. Adequate lighting facilities shall be
provided by the General Contractor.
1.12 Maintenance Materials:
1. At project completion provide [4 liters (1 gallon) of each type and color of paint from same
production run (batch mix) used in unopened cans] [full unopened cans of surplus paint], properly
labeled and identified for Owner’s later use in maintenance. Store where directed.
1.13 Waste Management and Disposal:
1. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.) are
regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information
on these controls from applicable [Provincial] [State] [Local] government departments having
jurisdiction.
2. All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available, collect
waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. Materials that
cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate
manner.
3. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes
and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.
4. To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into
the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to:
a. Retain cleaning water for water based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In
no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water.
b. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers
and ensure proper disposal.
c. Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant
recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.
d. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous
waste regulations.
e. Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).
f. Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive
containers and store protected in well ventilated fire safe area at moderate temperature.
5. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by the Owner and
deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.
1.14 Guarantee:
1. Furnish either the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s two (2) year guarantee,
or, alternatively, a 100% two (2) year Maintenance Bond - both in accordance with MPI Painting
Manual requirements. The Maintenance Bond shall warrant that all painting work has been
performed in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements.
2. All painting and decorating work shall be in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements
and shall be inspected by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s Paint
Inspection Agency (inspector), whether using either the MPI Accredited Quality Assurance
Association’s guarantee, or the Maintenance Bond option. The cost for such inspections, and for
either the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s Guarantee, or the Maintenance
Bond, shall be included in the Base Bid Price.
3. Painting and decorating Subcontractors choosing the Maintenance Bond option shall provide
maintenance bond consent from a reputable surety company licensed to do business in Canada.
Cash or certified checks are not acceptable in lieu of surety consent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials:
1. Only materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, etc.) listed in the
latest edition of the MPI Approved Product List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project. All
such material shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
2. Other materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents, etc. shall be the highest quality
product of an MPI listed manufacturer and shall be compatible with paint materials being used as
required.
3. All materials used shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC content where
possible.
4. Where required, use only materials having a minimum MPI “Environmentally Friendly” [E1] [E2]
[E3] rating based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels.
5. Where indoor air quality (odour) is an issue, use only MPI listed materials having a minimum [E2]
[E3] rating.
6. [Where required to meet LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) program
requirements, use only MPI listed materials having an “L” rating designation.]
NOTES – ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
1. The use of water borne versus oil based paints and coatings require careful evaluation. The
release of VOC’s and solvent vapours during painting and cleanup, particularly in confined areas and
where such vapours may prove offensive to individuals in an occupied facility are a consideration, as
well as the oft forgotten residue flushed down the drain during water-borne paint cleanup. Any
evaluation must be carefully and dispassionately considered based on actual VOC content of the
product used and that released over the life cycle term, on actual site conditions and on long-term
durability and life cycle costing requirements.
2. In assessing the requirements for selection of environmentally friendly water borne or oil based
paint product, total VOC content and life cycle / durability must be considered. Refer to MPI Approved
Products listing for the VOC content level of paint products and to the MPI website (www.paintinfo.com)
for current information.
3. Specifying authorities should also be aware that the current range of ecology paint products is very
limited and should not be used as selection criteria.
4. From an environmental impact point of view, tints are likely the component with the greatest
environmental impact and health risks. For this reason, pastel shades may be more preferable to use
then more heavily saturated colours.
7. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of
blemishes, sags, air entrapment, etc. Refer to 3.7, Field Quality Control / Standard of
Acceptance requirements.
8. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings
designated by local Code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Glass Reflective Beads (for pavement marking): of type suitable for application to a wet paint
surface for light reflectance. Apply beads at a minimum rate of 0.5 kg/l (5 lbs/g) to an MPI listed
white and/or yellow latex or alkyd zone / traffic marking paint.
10. Slip Resistant Additive (SRA): rubber aggregate, clean/washed silica sand or ground walnut
chips (interior dry areas only) for use with or as a component part of paint (usually floor / porch /
stair enamel) on horizontal surfaces as required to provide slip resistance. Where site applied,
material to either mixed into paint (and mixed constantly to keep material in suspension) or
broadcast into first or prime coat as required.
2.2 Equipment:
1. Painting and Decorating Equipment: to best trade standards for type of product and application.
2. Spray Painting Equipment: of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of paint or
coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times.
2.3 Mixing and Tinting:
1. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved, all paint shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted.
Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.
2. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
3. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
4. If required, thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's
instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer
and provide copy of instructions to Consultant.
2.4 Finish and Colors:
1. Unless otherwise specified herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI [Custom]
[Premium] Grade finish requirements.
2. Colors shall be as selected by the Consultant from a manufacturer’s full range of colors. [Refer to
Finish Schedule for identification and location of colors.] [A Finish Schedule will be furnished after
award of the Contract.]
NOTES:
1. Note that Finish Schedule should include all exterior and interior painted items (e.g. siding, doors, frames, trim, base,
sills, walls, decks, railings, etc.) and the gloss level. The paint manufacturer and color code number should also be
provided if selected by the Designer.
2. In addition, where more than one color is used on walls within an area this shall also be scheduled.
Generally and unless otherwise specified herein or noted on Finish Schedules the quantity
of colors and finishes shall be based on the following criteria:
NOTES:
1. Delete, revise or add to the following example selections below to suit project requirements.
2. Revise number of colors and schemes to suit project requirements and ensure these items are noted on the Exterior
and Interior Finish Schedules.
3. Exterior colors will be based on [three (3)] base colors and [two (2)] accent colors with a
maximum of [one (1)] deep or bright color. No more than [six (6)] colors will be selected for the
entire project. Note that this does not include pre-finished items by others, e.g. flashings,
aluminum or vinyl windows, aluminum doors, etc.
4. Interior colors will be based on [five (5)] base colors and [three (3)] accent colors with a maximum
of [one (1)] deep or bright color. No more than [eight (8)] colors will be selected for the entire
project and no more than [three (3)] colors will be selected in each area. Note that this does not
include pre-finished items by others, e.g. aluminum or vinyl windows, aluminum doors and
handrails, etc.
5. Interior colors and/or patterns shall be consistent [throughout each unit] with [two (2)] [three (3)]
separate schemes prepared.
6. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled, walls shall be painted the same color within a given area.
7. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating) shall be painted [white] [the same color
as walls].
8. Corridors shall be painted [the same color on all floors] [different colors on alternate floors] with
[two (2)] separate [two (2)] color schemes prepared for doors and trim.
9. Designated rooms / spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color than
typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of [two (2)] colors
required.
10. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, interior walls and ceiling surfaces
shall be painted in accordance with the following criteria over appropriate prime / sealer coat:
[a. all areas (except as noted): washable latex with G3 (eggshell) finish.]
[b. laundry facilities / rooms, public wash / shower / bathrooms, residential kitchens and
bathrooms and en-suites: [washable latex] [alkyd] with G5 (semi-gloss) finish.]
[c. public change / wash / shower rooms and institutional facility bathing and shower rooms:
epoxy (tile-like) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for wet surfaces.]
[d. public and institutional facility “clean” or “sanitary” areas such as food preparation and
laboratory areas: epoxy (tile-like) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for dry surfaces.]
11. [Doors shall be painted a different color than door frames and trim with walls a different color than
either.] [Doors, frames and trim shall be painted a different color than walls] [The same color as
walls.] Unless otherwise noted or scheduled all doors, frames and trim shall be painted using a
G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
12. Window frames (unless pre-finished) [including trim and sills shall be painted [a different color
than walls] [the same color as walls] [shall be painted a different color than window trim and sills
and a different color than walls]. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled all window frames, trim
and sills shall be painted using a G5 (semi-gloss) finish.
13. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, exit and vestibule doors shall be painted a
contrasting color to walls and a different color than any other door in the same area.
14. Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware (e.g. door closers), registers,
radiators and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to match adjacent
surfaces (i.e. same color, texture and sheen), unless otherwise noted or where pre-finished.
15. Plywood service panels (e.g. electrical, telephone and cable vision panels) including edges shall
be back-primed and painted [flat gray] [to match painted wall mounted on].
16. The inside of light valances shall be painted gloss white.
17. The inside of all duct work behind louvers, grills and diffusers for a minimum of 460 mm (18") or
beyond sight line, whichever is greater, shall be painted using flat black (non-reflecting) paint.
18. Parking bays lines shall be identified with 100 mm (4") wide white or yellow painted lines with
each bay consecutively numbered with 50 mm (2") wide white or yellow painted numbers in
accordance with approved parking layout and/or in accordance with the requirements or
authorities having jurisdiction.
19 Barrier free accessible parking bays and refuge areas shall be identified with appropriate symbol
designation and/or in accordance with the requirements or authorities having jurisdiction.
20. Pedestrian walkways shall be identified with 100 mm (4") wide yellow painted lines at 45 degrees
to path of travel spaced at 450 mm (18") o.c. and/or in accordance with the requirements or
authorities having jurisdiction.
21. Low headroom areas shall be identified with minimum 100 mm (4") wide yellow band on leading
edge marked "CAUTION _ LOW CLEARANCE" in 50 mm (2") high black letters at suitable
intervals and/or in accordance with the requirements or authorities having jurisdiction.
22. Where other methods are not specified (i.e. applied material or nosing) and/or in accordance with
the requirements or authorities having jurisdiction at stairs providing access and exit for persons
with visual impairment, slip resistant paint shall be applied to handrails and treads. Slip resistant
paint shall be of a contrasting color at tactile warning strips at stair treads and landings.
2.5 Gloss / Sheen Ratings:
1. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following
MPI values:
Gloss Description Units Units

Level @ 60 degrees @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10max.
G2 Velvet finish 0 to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35 35 min.
G5 Semi-Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to 85
G7 High-Gloss finish > 85
2. Gloss level ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein and as noted on Finish
Schedule.
NOTES:
1. A high gloss finish provides more physical and stain resistance with such painted surfaces appearing to have a “hard”
finish. Such glossy finishes, however tend to enhance textures or defects of the surface to which they are applied.
Use of higher gloss finishes should be reviewed from the point of view of excessive surface preparation required
which might not be warranted for the surface to be coated.
2. Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency having jurisdiction, the use of deep colors or high
contrast accent colors will require a minimum of three or more finish coats over primer to achieve satisfactory hiding
results.
3. Caution should be used when specifying deep colors in high traffic areas, regardless of the surface to which these
colors are applied. Machine tinted color in a flat, eggshell, semi-gloss and to some extent high gloss finish will mark
easily and leave an unsightly appearance with loss of sheen and with considerable reduction of abrasion resistance.
In such cases, either a clear urethane or high performance acrylic type of coating over such deep colors may solve
the problem but may also result in a change in hue and where touch-up painting is required the entire surface will
have to be redone from break to break or from corner to corner as spot touch-up will be very noticeable. Refer to MPI
Painting Manual.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Condition of Surfaces:
1. Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine (and test as required) all
conditions and surfaces scheduled to be painted and report in writing to the Contractor and
Consultant any conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect work of this section.
2. No painting work shall commence until all such adverse conditions and defects have been
corrected and surfaces and conditions are acceptable to the Painting Subcontractor and
Inspection Agency.
3. Commencement of work shall not be held to imply acceptance of surfaces except as qualified
herein. Such surfaces as concrete, masonry, structural steel and miscellaneous metal, wood,
gypsum board and plaster, shall not be the responsibility of the Painting Subcontractor.
4. The Painting Subcontractor shall not be responsible for the condition of the substrate or for
correcting defects and deficiencies in the substrate which may adversely affect the painting work
except for minimal work normally performed by the Painting Subcontractor and as indicated
herein. It shall always, however, be the responsibility of the Painting Subcontractor to see that
surfaces are properly prepared before any paint or coating is applied.
3.2 Preparation of Surfaces:
1. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. Refer to the MPI Painting Manual in
regard to specific requirements [for the following:]
a. environmental conditions.
b. pH testing.
c. acid etching.
d. rust stain removal.
e. asphalt surfaces.
f. vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces.
g. clay and concrete masonry units.
h. structural steel and miscellaneous metals.
i. steel exposed to high heat.
j. galvanized and zinc coated metal.
k. aluminum and copper surfaces.
l. glue laminated beams and columns.
m. dimension and dressed lumber.
n. wood doors.
o. wood paneling and casework.
p. wood decks, floors, stairs and steps.
q. wood shingles and shakes.
r. stucco, plaster and gypsum board.
s. acoustical panels and tiles.
t. canvas and cotton coverings.
u. bituminous coated surfaces.
2. Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and/or test all surfaces under adequate illumination, ventilation
and temperature requirements.
3. Remove and securely store all miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings / fastenings (e.g.
electrical plates, mechanical louvers, door and window hardware (e.g. hinges, knobs, locks, trim,
frame stops), removable rating / hazard / instruction labels, washroom accessories, light fixture
trim, etc. from wall and ceiling surfaces, doors and frames, prior to painting. Carefully clean and
replace all such items upon completion of painting work in each area. Do not use solvent or
reactive cleaning agents on items that will mark or remove finishes (e.g. lacquer finishes). Doors
shall be removed before painting to paint bottom and top edges and then re-hung.
4. Protect all adjacent interior surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on doors,
frames, equipment, piping, etc., from painting operations and damage with drop cloths, shields,
masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by
failure to provide such protection.
5. Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly after
the first coat of paint. Start of finish painting of defective surfaces (e.g. gypsum board) shall
indicate acceptance of substrate and any costs of making good defects shall be borne by the
painter including re-painting of entire defective surface (no touch-up painting).
6. Confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items. Refer to Quality Assurance.
NOTES:
1. Primers (e.g. alkyd, epoxy, zinc, etc.) require over coating within manufacturer’s specified time limits. After this time
they may become too hard to facilitate good adhesion. This is particularity important in the selection and use of
primers in the fabrication of structural steel and miscellaneous metal. Shop cleaning procedures, the selection of the
“correct” primer and inspection for such work must be in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements.
2. Painting work shall be scheduled before the installation of miscellaneous hardware, surface fittings, fastenings,
fixtures and trim by others including the hanging of doors and installation of door hardware. If such items require the
removal, storage, and reinstallation, the coordination and onus rests with the General Contractor. Extensive touch-up
painting necessary as a result of the installation or re-installation of such fittings by others after painting, shall be
considered as additional services at additional cost to the Owner.
3.3 Application:
1. Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until all environmental conditions (heating,
ventilation, lighting and completion of other sub-trade work) are acceptable for applications of
products.
2. Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual [Premium] [Custom] Grade finish
requirements.
3. Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
4. Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer’s paint
specifications require earlier applications.
5. Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
consistency and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
7. Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency, apply a minimum of four coats of
paint where deep or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.
NOTE: Refer to Spec Notes at beginning of 2.5 in regard to the use of deep colors.
8. Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects
visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39”).
9. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer’s directions
state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied.
10. Prime coat of stain or varnish finishes may be reduced in accordance with manufacturer’s
directions.
11. Paint finish shall continue through behind all wall-mounted items (e.g. chalk and tack boards).
PAINT SYSTEM SPECS NOTES:
1. Select appropriate paint systems for exterior and interior surfaces to be painted and delete all other systems not
required.
2. Insert appropriate gloss level rating (G1, G2, etc.) in place of [insert gloss level]. Refer to MPI Approved Product
Listings to ensure that desired gloss level is available. Specific paint colors and gloss ratings should be indicated on
Finish Schedules for both interior and exterior surfaces.
3. Where different finishes are required under a specific heading, a reference to applicable materials must be inserted
after the finish, e.g.:
EXT 6.3B Alkyd G5 finish for wood doors and frames.

EXT 6.4B Alkyd G4 finish for fascias.
INT 9.2C Latex sealer / alkyd G5 finish for kitchens and bathroom surfaces.
INT 9.2C Latex sealer / alkyd G3 finish for all other surfaces.
4. Where both Custom Grade (typically one primer and one finish coat) and Premium Grade (typically one primer and
two finish coats) systems are used, indicate same on the Finish Schedule or indicate specific system when it differs
from the “typical” grade selected.
5. Where choice of an “Environmentally Friendly” (i.e., low odor / VOC) “green”) product is required, specifier must
consult MPI Product Selection Guide and select system / products having desired E1, E2 or E3 rating. This includes
non-latex / non-water based paints and finishes which meet EPA Method 24 / MPI criteria.
6. For individual product selection and evaluations refer to MPI Painting Manual Approved Product List.
7. For specific surface preparation requirements for each system refer to Chapters 2 (Exterior) and 3 (Interior) of the
MPI Painting Manual.
8. Ensure that shop preparation and shop primers for exterior and interior structural steel and miscellaneous metals are
compatible with field applied coatings. This can be done by incorporating the following notes within each appropriate
steel work specification section.
“Shop primers for all exterior and interior painted steel work shall be of types specified in the painting specification
section. Where non-complying primers are used by the steel fabricator, the fabricator shall completely remove same
from all surfaces and prepare and prime surfaces in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900 for painted
steel work at no additional cost to the Owner or the painter.”
“The Fabricator of structural steel and miscellaneous metal items shall notify the Paint Inspection Agency on award of
contract and provide a written confirmation of preparation procedures and of primers used for all steel items supplied.”
“A third party independent inspection agency may periodically inspect all exterior and interior steel work to be painted
for finish, surface preparation and application of required primers.”
9. For specific surface preparation and paint system selection requirements of previously painted adjacent surfaces refer
to the MPI Repainting Manual.
3.4 Exterior Finish / Coating Systems:
Paint exterior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements:
1. Asphalt Surfaces: (zone / traffic marking for drive and parking areas, etc.)
EXT 2.1A Latex zone / traffic marking finish.

EXT 2.1B Alkyd zone / traffic marking finish.
NOTES:
1. Determine if painting of zone / traffic or game lines on asphalt surfaces is or is not included under work of this section
and ensure this work is coordinated or included in the appropriate section of work. Include the following statements
as appropriate:
2. Painting of zone / traffic line layouts on exterior asphalt surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with requirements of
the MPI Painting Manual, approved drawings and Section [insert appropriate section number].
3. Painting of game line layouts on exterior asphalt surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with the requirements of the
MPI Painting Manual, approved drawings, Section [insert appropriate section number].
2. Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)
EXT 3.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer).
EXT 3.1B Latex [insert gloss level] finish over latex [insert texture type] aggregate.
EXT 3.1C Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 3.1D Epoxy (over epoxy)
EXT 3.1E Epoxy-modifed latex finish.
EXT 3.1F Elastomeric coating.
EXT 3.1G Water repellent (non-paintable) finish.
EXT 3.1H Water repellent (paintable) finish.
EXT 3.1J Concrete stain finish.
EXT 3.1K Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 3.1L High-build latex finish.
EXT 3.1M Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 3.1N Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate finish.
NOTES:
1. Note that the application of water repellent sealers to exterior concrete surfaces may be by others in accordance with
concrete finishes specification requirements. When such surfaces are also required to be painted after the application
of a water repellent sealer, ensure that a paintable sealer is used. Ensure this work is coordinated or included in the
appropriate section of work.
2. When EXT 3.1G, 3.1H or 3.1J systems are not part of the work under this section include the following statement:
“The application of [water repellent sealers][concrete stain] to exterior concrete vertical surfaces shall be done by
others in accordance with the requirements of Section 03300.”
3. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: (decks, stairs, driveways, parking and court areas, etc.) (SRA
Optional for all these systems)
EXT 3.2A Latex floor paint [gloss] [low gloss] finish.

EXT 3.2B Latex deck coating.
EXT 3.2C Epoxy deck coating, slip resistant.
EXT 3.2D Alkyd floor enamel [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 3.2E Latex zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking lines, etc]
EXT 3.2F Alkyd zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking lines, etc]
EXT 3.2G Sealer, clear finish.
EXT 3.2H Sealer, clear, water based finish.
EXT 3.2J Concrete stain finish.
SPEC NOTE: Determine if painting of zone / traffic lines on concrete surfaces is or is not included under work of this
section and ensure this work is coordinated or included in the appropriate section of work. Note that such
work may be done by others as an extension of asphalt pavement marking work. Include the following
statement as appropriate:
“Painting of zone / traffic line layouts on exterior concrete surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with MPI
Painting Manual requirements, approved drawings and Section [insert appropriate section number].”
4. Cementitious Composition Board Surfaces: (vertical surfaces, horizontal soffits)
EXT 3.3A Latex [insert gloss level] finish.

EXT 3.3B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 3.3D Epoxy-modifed latex finish.
EXT 3.3E Epoxy finish.
EXT 3.3F Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 3.3G Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate finish.
EXT 3.3H High-build latex finish.
EXT 3.3J Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer).
5. Clay Masonry Units: (pressed and extruded brick)

EXT 4.1B Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate finish.
EXT 4.1D Epoxy finish. [for smooth brick]
EXT 4.1F Water repellent (non-paintable) finish.
EXT 4.1G Water repellent (paintable) finish.
EXT 4.1J Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
NOTES:
1. Note that the application of water repellent sealers to exterior clay and concrete masonry surfaces may be by others
in accordance with clay or concrete masonry specification requirements. When such surfaces are also required to be
painted after the application of a water repellent sealer, ensure that a paintable sealer is used. Ensure this work is
coordinated or included in the appropriate section of work.
2. When EXT 4.1F, 4.1G, 4.2H and 4.2J systems are not part of the work under these sections include the following
statement:
“The application of water repellent sealers to exterior clay masonry or concrete masonry surfaces shall be done by
others in accordance with the requirements of Section [insert appropriate section number].”
6. Concrete Masonry Units: (smooth and split face block and brick).
EXT 4.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex block filler).
EXT 4.2C Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating. [for moderate chemical
resistance]
EXT 4.2D Elastomeric coating.
EXT 4.2G Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over high build epoxy).
EXT 4.2H Water repellent (non-paintable) finish. [not for use on light weight block]
EXT 4.2J Water repellent (paintable) finish. [not for use on light weight block]
EXT 4.2K High-build latex finish.
EXT 4.2L Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer).
NOTE: When EXT 4.2H or 4.2I systems are not part of the work under this section include the following statement:
“The application of water repellent sealers to exterior concrete masonry surfaces shall be done by others in
accordance with the requirements of Section 04200.”
7. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:
EXT 5.1A Quick dry enamel [insert gloss level] finish.

EXT 5.1B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over inorganic zinc
primer).
EXT 5.1C Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over alkyd primer).
EXT 5.1D Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
EXT 5.1F Epoxy (over H.B. epoxy) finish.
EXT 5.1G Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy zinc rich primer and high build
epoxy).
EXT 5.1H Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 5.1J Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over high build epoxy).
EXT 5.1K Aluminum paint finish.
EXT 5.1L Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over inorganic zinc primer and high build
epoxy).
EXT 5.1M Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over rust inhibitive
primer).
EXT 5.1N Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over epoxy primer).
EXT 5.1P Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy zinc rich primer).
EXT 5.1Q Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over surface tolerant primer).
EXT 5.1R Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over H. B. epoxy).
EXT 5.1S Epoxy (over self-priming epoxy).
EXT 5.1T Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over H.B. self-priming epoxy).
EXT 5.1V Epoxy deck coating finish (over epoxy primer and epoxy high build) (with SRA).
EXT 5.1X Epoxy finish (with SRA) (over H.B. self-priming epoxy).
8. Steel - High Heat: (heat exchangers, breeching, pipes, flues, stacks, etc., with temperature
range as noted)
EXT 5.2A Heat resistant enamel finish, maximum 400 F (205 C)

EXT 5.2B Heat resistant enamel, aluminum finish, maximum 800 F (427 C).
EXT 5.2C Inorganic zinc rich coating, maximum 750 F (400 C).
EXT 5.2D High heat resistant coating, maximum 1100 F (593 C).
9. Galvanized Metal: (not chromate passivated)

For high contact / high traffic areas (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, etc.)
For low contact / low traffic areas (overhead decking, ducts, gutters, flashing, etc.)

EXT 5.3C Epoxy finish. [for use on high contact / high traffic areas]
EXT 5.3D Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over vinyl wash and epoxy primer). [for use on
high contact / high traffic areas]
EXT 5.3E Bituminous finish. [for use on low contact / low traffic areas, e.g. unexposed
galvanized metal next to concrete, masonry, etc.]
EXT 5.3F Aluminum paint finish. [for use on low contact / low traffic areas only]
EXT 5.3G Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating. [for moderate chemical
resistance]
EXT 5.3H Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over water based primer). [for low contact / low
traffic areas - do not use flat finish on doors]
EXT 5.3J Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over water based
primer). [For moderate chemical resistance]
EXT 5.3K Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over epoxy).
EXT 5.3L Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy primer) [for use on high contact / high
traffic areas]
NOTES:
1. Particular attention should be paid to the durability of zinc coated surfaces on exterior high contact / high traffic areas
such as doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, etc. Do not use EXT 5.3E and 5.3F in these areas.
2. High contact / high traffic areas to include doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, etc.
3. Low contact / low traffic areas to include overhead decking, ducts, pipes, gutters, flashing, misc. steel, etc.
10. Aluminum: (sash, sills and frames, flashing, posts and railings, downpipes, etc.)
EXT 5.4A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over vinyl wash primer and quick dry primer).
EXT 5.4B Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 5.4C Aluminum paint finish.
EXT 5.4D Bituminous finish. [for unexposed aluminum next to concrete, masonry, etc.]
EXT 5.4E Epoxy finish (over vinyl wash primer).
EXT 5.4F Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry metal primer).
EXT 5.4G Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over quick dry metal
primer).
EXT 5.4H Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry metal primer).
11. Copper: (excluding roofs)
EXT 5.5A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over vinyl wash primer).
EXT 5.5B Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 5.5D Bituminous finish. [for unexposed copper next to concrete, masonry, etc.]
EXT 5.5F Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer). [for properly prepared
surfaces only]
EXT 5.5G Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 5.5H Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
12. Stainless Steel: (unpolished)
EXT 5.6A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.

EXT 5.6B Polyurethane, pigmented finish.

EXT 5.6D Epoxy finish.
EXT 5.6F Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 5.6G Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
13. Glue Laminated Beams and Columns:
EXT 6.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.1B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.1C Solid color stain finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.1D Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain).
EXT 6.1E Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish (over stain).
EXT 6.1F Fire retardant, pigmented coating.
EXT 6.1G Fire retardant penetrating wood preservative, clear coating.
EXT 6.1H Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
EXT 6.1J Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
EXT 6.1K Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.
EXT 6.1L Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
EXT 6.1M Varnish, water based [insert gloss level].
14. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, siding, fencing,
etc.)
EXT 6.2B Solid color, water based stain finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.2C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.2D Solid color stain finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.2E Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain).
EXT 6.2F Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 6.2G Fire retardant penetrating wood preservative, clear coating.
EXT 6.2H Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
EXT 6.2J Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
EXT 6.2K Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.
EXT 6.2L Semi-transparent stain finish.
EXT 6.2M Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
EXT 6.2N Varnish, water based [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 6.2P Stain, Semi-Transparent, water based.
15. Dressed Lumber: (doors, door and window frames, casings, battens, smooth facias, etc.)
EXT 6.3A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer). [do not use flat finish on
doors]
EXT 6.3B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd/oil primer). [do not use flat finish on
doors]
EXT 6.3C Solid color stain finish (over alkyd/oil primer). [do not use on high contact areas
or on doors]
EXT 6.3D Semi-transparent stain finish. [do not use on doors]
EXT 6.3E Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain).
EXT 6.3F Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.
EXT 6.3G Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
EXT 6.3H Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
EXT 6.3J Water based light industrial [gloss] [semi-gloss] coating. [for doors and frames
only]
EXT 6.3K Solid color stain, water based finish. [do not use flat for doors and frames]
EXT 6.3L Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer). [do not use flat finish on
doors]
EXT 6.2M Varnish, water based [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 6.2N Stain, semi-transparent, water based.
16. Wood Paneling: (plywood siding, fascias, soffits, etc.)
EXT 6.4A Solid color stain, water based finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.4D Semi-transparent stain finish.
EXT 6.4E Fire retardant, pigmented coating.
EXT 6.4F Fire retardant penetrating wood preservative, clear coating.
EXT 6.4G Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
EXT 6.4H Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.
EXT 6.4J Varnish [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish (over stain).
EXT 6.4K Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
EXT 6.2L Stain, semi-transparent, water based.
17. Wood Decks and Stairs / Steps: (using spaced lumber) – (SRA Optional for all Systems)
EXT 6.5A Latex porch and floor [gloss] [low gloss] finish [with SRA] (over alkyd primer).
EXT 6.5B Alkyd floor enamel [gloss] [low gloss] finish [with SRA].
EXT 6.5C Alkyd floor enamel [gloss] [low gloss] finish [with SRA] (over wood preservative).
[for untreated wood].
EXT 6.5D Deck stain (over wood preservative).
EXT 6.5E Latex porch and floor [gloss] [low gloss] finish [with SRA] (over latex primer).
EXT 6.5F Deck stain finish.
EXT 6.5G Latex deck coating. [for plywood decks]
NOTE: If pressure treated wood material is to be stained or painted after installation the chemical formulation of the
treatment MUST be ascertained so that the correct stain or paint can be chosen. Obtain this information
from the supplier or manufacturer (treatment plant) and send to the Painting Association for analysis and
compatibility with paint or stain to be used.
18. Wood Shingles and Shakes: (excluding roofs)
EXT 6.6D Solid color stain, water based finish (over alkyd/oil primer).
EXT 6.6E Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
EXT 6.6F Semi-transparent stain finish.
19. Fiberglass: (panels, trims, fabrications, etc.)

EXT 6.7D Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy).
EXT 6.7E Epoxy-modified latex finish.
EXT 6.7F Epoxy finish.
20. Plastic: (vinyl siding and windows including related trims, ABS / PVA / PVC materials,
fabrications, etc.)

21. Stucco: (walls and soffits)
EXT 9.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish

EXT 9.1B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 9.1C Elastomeric coating.
EXT 9.1D Epoxy finish.

EXT 9.1F Water repellent (non-paintable) finish.
EXT 9.1G Water repellent (paintable) finish.
EXT 9.1J Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali resistant primer).
22. Canvas and Cotton Coverings: (pipes, ductwork, etc.)

EXT 10.1B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
EXT 10.1C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
EXT 10.1D Aluminum paint finish.
23. Bituminous Coated Surfaces: (cast iron pipe, concrete, etc.)
EXT 10.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over w.b. rust-inhibitive primer).
EXT 10.2C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over w.b. rust-inhibitive primer).
EXT 10.2D Aluminum paint finish (over w.b. rust-inhibitive primer).
3.5 Interior Paint and Coating Systems:
Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements:
1. Asphalt Surfaces: (zone / traffic marking of interior drive and parking areas)
INT 2.1A Latex zone / traffic marking finish.

INT 2.1B Alkyd zone / traffic marking finish.
NOTES:
1. Determine if painting of zone / traffic or game lines on asphalt surfaces is or is not included under work of this section
and ensure this work is coordinated or included in the appropriate section of work. Include the following statements
as appropriate:
2. Painting of zone / traffic line layouts on interior asphalt surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with approved
drawings, Section 02740 and MPI Painting Manual requirements.
3. Painting of game line layouts on interior asphalt surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with approved drawings,
Section 02740 and MPI Painting Manual requirements.
2. Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)
INT 3.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkali-resistant primer).
INT 3.1B Latex [insert gloss level] finish over [insert texture type] latex aggregate.
INT 3.1C High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.1D Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.1E Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.1F Epoxy (tile-like) finish. [for smooth concrete]
INT 3.1G Epoxy-modified latex finish [for smooth concrete]
INT 3.1H Multicolor finish.
INT 3.1J Water repellent paintable finish.
INT 3.1K Concrete stain finish.
INT 3.1L Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 3.1M Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.1N Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate coating.
INT 3.1P Epoxy high build low gloss finish (over epoxy high build low gloss).
INT 3.1Q Epoxy high build gloss finish (over epoxy high build gloss).
SPEC NOTES:
1. Note that the application of a clear sealer on interior concrete surfaces may be by others in accordance with concrete
finishes specification requirements. When such surfaces are also required to be painted after the application of a
water repellent sealer, ensure that a paintable sealer is used. Ensure this work is coordinated or included in the
appropriate section of work.
2. When INT 3.1J or 3.1K systems are not part of the work under this section include the following statement:
“The application of a [clear water repellent sealer][concrete stain] to interior concrete vertical surfaces shall be done
by others in accordance with the requirements of Section 03300.”
3. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: (floors and stairs)
INT 3.2A Latex floor enamel [gloss] [low gloss] finish.

INT 3.2B Alkyd floor enamel [gloss] [low gloss] finish.
INT 3.2C Epoxy finish.
INT 3.2D Pigmented polyurethane finish.
INT 3.2E Concrete stain finish.
INT 3.2F Concrete floor sealer finish.
INT 3.2G Concrete floor sealer, water based finish.
INT 3.2H Latex zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking lines, etc]
INT 3.2J Alkyd zone / traffic marking finish. [for parking lines, etc]
INT 3.2K Polyurethane, Clear (2 component) finish.
INT 3.2L Epoxy high build low gloss finish (over epoxy high build low gloss).
INT 3.2M Epoxy high build gloss finish (over epoxy high build gloss).
NOTE: Determine if painting of zone / traffic lines on interior concrete surfaces is or is not included under work of
this section and ensure this work is coordinated or included in the appropriate section of work. Note that
such work may be done by others as an extension of asphalt pavement marking work. Include the following
statement as appropriate:
“Painting of zone / traffic line layouts on interior concrete surfaces to be (by others) in accordance with
approved drawings, Section 02740 and MPI Painting Manual requirements.”
4. Cementitious Composition Board Surfaces:
INT 3.3A Latex [insert gloss level] finish.

INT 3.3B High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.3C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.3D Epoxy-modified latex finish.
INT 3.3E Epoxy (tile like) finish.
INT 3.3F Multicolor finish.
INT 3.3G Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 3.3H Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
5. Clay Masonry Units: (pressed and extruded brick)

INT 4.1B Latex [insert gloss level], [insert texture type], aggregate coating.
INT 4.1C Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 4.1D Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 4.1F Epoxy (tile like) finish, [for smooth concrete]
INT 4.1G Epoxy-modified latex finish. [for smooth surfaces]
INT 4.1J Water repellent, clear (paintable) finish.
INT 4.1K Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
INT 4.1L High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
NOTES:
1. Note that the application of water repellent and clear finishes to interior clay and concrete masonry surfaces may be
by others in accordance with clay or concrete masonry specification requirements. When such is the case, include
the following statement:
“The application of a water repellent and/or clear finishes to interior clay and/or concrete masonry surfaces shall be
done by others in accordance with the requirements of Section [insert appropriate section numbers].”
2. Consider also, if such surfaces will be painted at some future date then a paintable water repellent finish should be
selected.
6. Concrete Masonry Units: (smooth and split face block and brick)

INT 4.2B Latex [insert gloss level] [insert texture type] aggregate coating.
INT 4.2D High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 4.2E Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 4.2F Epoxy (tile-like) finish. [for dry environments]
INT 4.2G Epoxy (tile-like) finish. [for wet environments]
INT 4.2J Epoxy-modified latex finish. [for dry environments].
INT 4.2K Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 4.2L Water repellent (non-paintable) finish. [do not use on light weight block]
INT 4.2M Water repellent (paintable) finish. [do not use on light weight block]
INT 4.2N Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over latex sealer).
INT 4.2P High performance architectural latex finish (over alkali resistant primer).
INT 4.2Q Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
INT 4.2R Epoxy high build low gloss finish (over epoxy high build low gloss).
INT 4.2S Epoxy high build gloss finish (over epoxy high build gloss).
7. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: (columns, beams, joists, etc.)
INT 5.1A Quick dry enamel [gloss] [semi-gloss] finish.

INT 5.1B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 5.1C Water based dry fall finish.
INT 5.1CC Water based dry fall finish (over quick dry shop primer). [for dry locations only]
INT 5.1D Alkyd dry fall finish.
INT 5.1DD Alkyd dry fall finish (over quick dry shop primer). [for dry locations only]
INT 5.1E Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.1F Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.1G Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over high-build epoxy).
INT 5.1H Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over inorganic zinc primer and epoxy).
INT 5.1J Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over epoxy zinc rich primer and epoxy).
INT 5.1K Epoxy-modified latex finish.
INT 5.1L Epoxy finish.
INT 5.1LL Epoxy Deck Coating finish (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.1M Aluminum paint finish.
INT 5.1N Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.1P High build epoxy (over epoxy zinc rich primer).
INT 5.1Q Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
INT 5.1R High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.1S Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.1T Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over surface tolerant primer).
INT 5.1U Polyurethane, pigmented finish (over self-priming epoxy).
INT 5.1V Epoxy finish (over self-priming epoxy).
INT 5.1W Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry shop primer). [for dry locations
only]
INT 5.1X Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry shop primer). [for dry locations
only]
INT 5.1Y Epoxy high builds low gloss finish (over primer)
INT 5.1Z Epoxy high build gloss finish (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.1QDS Quick dry shop paint finish (for dry locations only). [do not topcoat]
8. Steel - High Heat: (boilers, furnaces, heat exchangers, breeching, pipes, flues, stacks, etc., with
temperature range as noted)
NT 5.2A Heat resistant enamel finish, maximum 400 F (205 C).

INT 5.2B Heat resistant enamel, aluminum paint finish, maximum 800 F (427 C).
INT 5.2C Inorganic zinc rich coating, maximum 750 F (400 C).
INT 5.2D High heat resistant coating, maximum 1100 F (593 C).
9. Galvanized Metal: (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, etc.)

INT 5.3B Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 5.3C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over cementitious primer).
INT 5.3D Epoxy finish (over epoxy primer).
INT 5.3E Epoxy finish (over vinyl wash primer and epoxy primer).
INT 5.3F Alkyd dry fall finish. [for use on low contact / low traffic areas only]
INT 5.3G Aluminum paint finish.
INT 5.3H Water based dry fall finish. [for use on low contact / low traffic areas only]
INT 5.3J Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over water based primer).
INT 5.3K Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over water based
primer).
INT 5.3L Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over non-cementitious primer).
INT 5.3M High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.3N Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
NOTES:
1. Particular attention should be paid to the durability of zinc coated surfaces on interior high contact / high traffic areas
such as doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, etc. Do not use a dry fall finish (INT 5.3F or INT 5.3H) in these areas.
2. High contact/traffic areas to include doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, etc.
3. Low contact/traffic areas to include overhead decking, ducts, pipes, gutters, flashing, misc. steel, etc.
10. Aluminum: (unanodized)
INT 5.4A Alkyd (over vinyl wash primer) [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.4B Epoxy finish.
INT 5.4C Polyurethane,pigmented finish.
INT 5.4D Aluminum paint finish. [for exposed aluminum]
INT 5.4E Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 5.4F High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.4H Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry primer for aluminum).
INT 5.4J Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over quick dry primer for aluminum).
11. Copper:
INT 5.5A Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.

INT 5.5B Epoxy finish.
INT 5.5C Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
INT 5.5D Aluminum paint finish.
INT 5.5E Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 5.5F High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.5H Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
12. Stainless Steel: (unpolished)
INT 5.6A Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over bonding primer).
INT 5.6B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.6C Epoxy finish.
INT 5.6D Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
INT 5.6E Aluminum paint finish.
INT 5.6F Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating (over quick dry primer).
INT 5.6G High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 5.6H Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
13. Glue Laminated Beams and Columns:
INT 6.1A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
INT 6.1C Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1D Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1E Polyurethane, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1F Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1G Semi transparent stain finish.
INT 6.1H Alkyd solid color stain finish.
INT 6.1J Polyurethane varnish [gloss] [satin] finish (over stain).
INT 6.1K Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.1M Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.1N High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1P Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain and sealer).
INT 6.1Q Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.1R Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.1S Polyurethane, clear, moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish (over stain).
INT 6.1T Latex solid color stain finish.
INT 6.1U Fire retardant, pigmented coating [insert gloss level] (ULC rated).
INT 6.1V Fire retardant, clear coating [insert gloss level] (ULC rated).
INT 6.1W Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
14. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.)
INT 6.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer).
INT 6.2D Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.2E Multicolor finish.
INT 6.2F Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] coating (ULC rated).
INT 6.2G Fire retardant, clear [insert gloss level] coating (ULC rated).
INT 6.2H Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.2J Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.2K Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain and sealer).
INT 6.2L Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.2M Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.2N Polyurethane,clear, moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish (over stain).
INT 6.2P Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.2Q Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
15. Dressed Lumber: (including doors, door and window frames, casings, molding, etc.)
INT 6.3A High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.

INT 6.3BB Alkyd, water based gloss finish. [interior doors and frames in non-humid
locations only]
INT 6.3C Semi-transparent stain finish. [do not use on doors]
INT 6.3D Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3E Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3F Lacquer [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3G Lacquer, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3H Lacquer, clear [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3J Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3K Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3M Danish oil finish.
INT 6.3N Multicolor finish.
INT 6.3P Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 6.3Q Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3R Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish (ULC rated).
INT 6.3S Fire retardant, clear finish (ULC rated).
INT 6.3T Latex [semi-gloss] [gloss] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.3U Latex [semi-gloss] [gloss] finish (over alkyd primer).
INT 6.3V Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.3W Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3X Polyurethane, clear, moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish.
INT 6.3Y Polyurethane, clear, moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish (over stain).
INT 6.3Z Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
16. Wood Paneling and Casework: (partitions, panels, shelving, millwork, etc.)
INT 6.4A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 6.4B Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 6.4C Semi-transparent stain finish.
INT 6.4D Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4E Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4F Lacquer [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4G Alkyd varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4H Lacquer, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4J Polyurethane varnish [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4K Danish oil finish.
INT 6.4L Multicolor finish.
INT 6.4M Water based, varnish clear [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4N Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 6.4P Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] coating (UL/ULC rated).
INT 6.4Q Fire retardant, clear coating (UL/ULC rated).
INT 6.4R Latex [semi-gloss] [gloss] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.4S High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4T Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4U Water based varnish, clear [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4V Polyurethane, clear moisture cured [gloss] [flat] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4W Lacquer [insert gloss level] finish (over stain).
INT 6.4X Lacquer, pigmented [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.4Y Lacquer, clear [insert gloss level] finish.
17. Wood Floors and Stairs: (including hardwood flooring, etc.) (SRA optional for all systems)
INT 6.5A Alkyd floor enamel [low gloss] [gloss] finish.

INT 6.5B Polyurethane varnish [gloss] finish (over stain).
INT 6.5C Polyurethane varnish [gloss] finish.
INT 6.5E Alkyd game line marking.
INT 6.5F Epoxy game line marking.
INT 6.5G Latex porch and floor [low gloss] [gloss] enamel finish.
INT 6.5H Polyurethane, moisture cured [gloss] finish (over stain).
INT 6.5 I Polyurethane, moisture cured [gloss] finish.
INT 6.5J Polyurethane, clear, 2 component finish.
NOTE: Painting of interior game line layouts is usually by others in accordance with gymnasium hardwood flooring
specification requirements. When not included under work of this section add the following:
“Painting of interior game line layouts is by others in accordance to the requirements of Section [09640].”
18. Wood Shingles and Shakes: (wall covering)
NT 6.6A Latex [insert gloss level] finish.

INT 6.6C Semi-transparent stain finish.
INT 6.6D Alkyd solid color stain finish.
INT 6.6E Latex solid color stain finish.
INT 6.6F Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex primer).
INT 6.6G Fire retardant, pigmented [insert gloss level] coating (UL/ULC rated).
INT 6.6H Fire retardant, clear [insert gloss level] coating (UL/ULC rated).
19. Fiberglass: (panels, trims, fabrications, etc.)

INT 6.7D Epoxy finish.
INT 6.7E Polyurethane, pigmented finish.
INT 6.7F Epoxy-modified latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.7G Multicolor finish.
INT 6.7H High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.7I Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
20. Plastic: (lumber, panels, trims, fabrications, vinyl wall covering, PVA / PVC materials, etc.)
INT 6.8A High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.8D Multicolor finish.
INT 6.8E Latex [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 6.8F Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
21. Spray Textured Surfaces: (ceilings)
INT 9.1A Latex, flat finish [for spray application only].

INT 9.1B Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 9.1C Alkyd, flat finish.
INT 9.1D Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 9.1E Latex finish. [for spray application only]
22. Plaster and Gypsum Board: (gypsum wallboard, drywall, “sheet rock type material”, etc., and
textured finishes)
INT 9.2A Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over latex sealer).
INT 9.2C Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over latex sealer).
INT 9.2E Epoxy (tile-like) finish.
INT 9.2F Epoxy-modified latex (tile-like) finish.
INT 9.2G Multicolor finish.
INT 9.2H Fire retardant coating [clear or pigmented] (UL/ULC rated).
INT 9.2J Water based fire retardant coating (UL/ULC rated).

INT 9.2K Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd primer). [use on plaster surfaces
only]
INT 9.2L Water based light industrial [insert gloss level] coating.
INT 9.2N Epoxy high build low gloss finish (over latex sealer).
INT 9.2P Epoxy high build gloss finish (over latex sealer).
23. Acoustic Panels and Tiles:
INT 9.3A Latex, flat finish.

INT 9.3B Latex [insert gloss level] finish (over alkyd sealer).
INT 9.3C Alkyd, flat finish.
INT 9.3D Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
INT 9.3E High performance architectural latex [insert gloss level] finish.
24. Canvas and Cotton Coverings:

INT 10.1C Aluminum paint finish.
INT 10.1D Institutional low odor / low VOC [insert gloss level] finish.
25. Bituminous Coated Surfaces: (cast iron pipe, concrete, etc.)

INT 10.2C Aluminum paint finish.
26. Painting of interior game line layouts with colors as noted on approved game line layout drawing
on interior resilient [gymnasium] flooring to be by others in accordance with [insert specification
Section] [MPI Painting Manual requirements].
3.6 Mechanical / Electrical Equipment and Related Surfaces:
NOTE: Coordinate painting of mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, conduit, system Identification with appropriate
Mechanical and Electrical specification sections.
1. Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all “unfinished” conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork
and other mechanical and electrical equipment with colour and texture to match adjacent
surfaces, in the following areas:
a. Where exposed-to-view in all exterior and interior areas.

b. In all interior high humidity interior areas.
c. In all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.
2. In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and
electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
3. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied
by manufacturer of equipment.
4. Do not paint over nameplates.
5. Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a minimum
of 460 mm (18”) or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat of matt black
(non-reflecting) paint.
6. Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.
7. Paint disconnects switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
8. Paint [red] or band all fire protection piping and sprinkler lines in accordance with mechanical
specification requirements. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.
9. Paint [yellow] or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification
requirements.
10. Back prime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical
equipment before installation [gray, semi-gloss] [to match adjacent wall surface]. Leave
equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting
accessories and other unfinished items.
11. Paint exterior steel electrical light standards. Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation
equipment.
3.7 Field Quality Control / Standard of Acceptance:
1. All surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.
2. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any
of the following defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection Agency inspector:
a. brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing
by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in
paint coatings.
b. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets,
corners and re-entrant angles.
c. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.
d. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from
the weather.
e. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint,
etc.).
3. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under
natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight) for interior
surfaces:
a. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles
from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
b. Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles
from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39”).
c. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at
normal viewing angles.
d. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen, texture,
and hiding across full surface area.
4. Painted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor.
Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film
thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags of damaged paint shall be removed by scraper
or by sanding prior to application of paint.
3.8 Protection:
1. Protect all exterior surfaces and areas, including landscaping, walks, drives, all adjacent building
surfaces (including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc.) and equipment and any labels and signage
from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other
suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide such
protection.
2. Protect all interior surfaces and areas, including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc. and equipment
and any labels and signage from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields,
masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by
failure to provide such protection.
3. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of or limit or direct traffic away or around work
area as required.
3.9 Clean-Up:
1. Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means
and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
2. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials
and debris.
3. Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of
same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water / solvents as well as all other cleaning and
protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint
removers / strippers in accordance with the safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.10 Repainting of Existing Finishes:
1. Refer to MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual and Section [insert appropriate section number] for
repainting of existing finishes.
2. Use finish coat of respective new surface paint system for minor repair of existing finishes. Use
system primer where existing finishes are damaged down to bare surface.
SUBJECT: SECTION 16542- EARTHING
SECTION 16452
EARTHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Description Of Work: This section includes complete installations to earth every source of energy
and to provide protective earthing and equipotential bonding, based on the TN-S system
arrangement, including:
1. Main earthing terminals or bars
2. Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment
3. Extraneous conductive parts
4. Standby generators neutral earthing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
A. “Grounding” or “Ground” used in other sections or divisions of the specification are interchangeably
used as “Earthing” or “Earth”.
B. Earth: conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any point is conventionally taken as
zero
C. Earth Electrode: conductor or group of conductors in initial contact with, and providing electrical
connection to Earth
D. Exposed Conductive Part: any part which can be readily touched and which is not a live part, but
which may become live under fault conditions
E. Extraneous Conductive Part: any conductive part not forming part of the electrical installation such
as structural metalwork of a building, metallic gas pipes, water pipes, heating tubes etc. and non-
electrical apparatus electrically connected to them i.e. radiators, cooking ranges, metal sinks etc.
and non-insulating floors and walls
F. Protective Conductor: conductor used for some measure of protection against electric shock and
intended for connecting together any of the following parts:
1. Exposed conductive parts
2. Extraneous conductive parts
3. Earth electrode(s)
4. Main earthing terminal bar(s)
5. Earthed point of the source(s)
G. Electrically Independent Earth Electrodes: earth electrodes located at such distance from one
another that maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not significantly affect the
potential of the other(s).
MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 16542 – EARTHING 1/7

H. Main Earthing Terminal or Bar: the terminal or bar provided for the connection of protective
conductors, including equipotential bonding and functional earthing conductors if any to the means
of earthing.
I. Equipotential Bonding: electrical connection to put exposed and extraneous conductive parts at a
substantial equal potential
J. Earthing Conductor: protective conductor connecting main earthing terminal or bar of an installation
to earth electrode or to other means of earthing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product Data: for earth rods, connectors and connection materials, and earthing fittings.
C. Equipment Data: prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but not limited to,
manufacturer’s catalogues for earth rods, connecting clamps, earthing conductors, protective
conductors, bonding conductors, connectors and other accessories, exothermic welding kits and
tools etc., and samples of conductors as requested.
D. Shop And Construction Drawings: submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and connections
2. Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indications of cross-section, depth of laying
and covering
3. Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors
4. Layout and details of earthing provisions at substations, generator rooms, switchgear,
distribution panelboards etc., indicating fittings used, insulation, plates and marking, passage
and routing of earthing conductors, conduit, sleeves, grooves, niches etc., giving sizes and
dimensions of component parts.
E. Report of Field Tests and Observations Certified by the Engineer. All tests shall be carried out in the
presence of and be certified by the Engineer.
A. Regulations And Standards carry out work in accordance with the following:
1. IEC publications 364-3 and 364-4-41 , Electrical Installations in Buildings
2. French Norms
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wallis or approved equal by Engineer.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Component Parts of earth system are to include the following:

1. Earth electrode (rods, tapes etc.)
2. Main earthing terminals or bars
3. Earthing conductors
4. Protective conductors
5. Equipotential bonding conductors
6. Electrically independent earth electrodes for special system
7. Accessories and termination fittings, bonding, welding kits and other material.
A. Earth Electrode is to consist of one or more earth rods, interconnected by buried earthing tape or
cable, which is to have a total combined resistance value, during any season of the year and before
interconnection to other earthed systems or earthing means, not exceeding 5 ohm. Distance between
two rods is not to be less than twice the length of one rod driven depth.
B. Ring Type Earth Electrode is to consist of earthing conductors, in a closed loop, buried in exterior wall
foundations underneath the water-proofing, or alternatively at 0.6 m around the perimeter of the
building foundations, as shown on the Drawings, to which all earthing conductors are to be connected.
Insulated connection flags into the building, of same material as earthing conductors, are to be located
at positions of service entrance and main switchboard rooms, terminating in bolt-type earth points
(studs) or test- links for connection of main earth bar(s). Additional earth rods connecting with the
earth ring are to be provided, as necessary, to bring down earth electrode resistance to an acceptable
value.
C. Functional Earth Electrode provide separately from, but interconnected to, other earth electrode(s)
through suitably rated (470 V) spark gap. Functional earth electrodes are to be used for earthing
electronic equipment (communication equipment, digital processors, computers etc.) as required by
the particular Section of the Specification and recommendation of manufacturer.
D. Alternative Earth Electrode provide other types of earth electrode that may be used, after approval,
including:
E. Cast iron pipes with special surround material
F. Copper plate(s)
G. Tape mats (strips).
H. Main Earthing Bar provide at point of service entrance or main distribution room, and as described in
the Specification or shown on the Drawings, to which all earthing conductors, protective conductors
and bonding conductors are to be connected. Two insulated main earthing conductors are to be
provided, one at each end of the bar, connected via testing joints to the earth electrode at two
separate earth pits. Conductor is to be sized to carry maximum earth fault current of system at point of
application with final conductor temperature not exceeding I 60°C for at least 5 seconds. Main
earthing conductors are to be minimum I 20 mm2 or as otherwise required by the particular Section of
the Specification.
I. Testing Joints (Test Links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each main earthing
conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.
J. Protective Conductors are to be separate for each circuits. Where protective conductor is common to
several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective conductor is to be the largest of the conductor
sizes. Selection of sizes is to be in accordance with Table 54G of IEE Regulations.
K. Protective Conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like. Where armoured
cable is specified and armour is steel, it may be used as a protective conductor, if approved and if not
otherwise shown on the Drawings.
L. Continuity Of Protective Conductors: series connection of protective conductor from one piece of
equipment to another is not permitted. Extraneous and exposed conductive parts of equipment are not
be used as protective conductors, but are to be connected by bolted clamp type connectors and/or
brazing to continuous protective conductors which are to be insulated by moulded materials.

M. Earth Fault Loop Impedance: for final circuits supplying socket outlets, earth fault impedance at every
socket outlet is to be such that disconnection of protective device on over current occurs with 0.4
seconds, and for final circuits supplying only fixed equipment, earth fault loop impedance at every
point of utilization is to be such that disconnection occurs within 5 seconds. Use appropriate tables
and present same for approval by the Engineer.
N. Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: all extraneous conductive part of the building such as metallic
water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and ducting,metallic conduit and raceways, cable trays
and cable armour are to be connected to nearest earthing terminals by Equipotential bonding
conductors. Cross-section of protective bonding conductor is not to be less than half that of the
2
protective conductor connected to respective earthing terminal, and minimum 4 mm .
O. Main Eguipotential Bonding: main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other metallic service
pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors to main earth terminal or bar.
Bonding connections are to be as short as practicable between point of entry/exit of services and main
earthing bar. Where meters are installed, bonding is to be made on the premises side of the meter.
Cross-sections of conductors are not to be less than half that of the earthing conductor connected
2
thereto, and minimum 6 mm .
P. Insulated Ground: A separate “Insulated Ground” wire shall be run from convenience receptacles
shown on Imax drawings directly to earth pit.
Q. Identification: connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and every bonding
conductor to extraneous conducting parts is to be labelled in accordance with the Regulations, as
follows:
R. Identification: protective and earthing conductors are to be identified by combination of green- and-
yellow colours of insulation or by painting bar conductors with these colours, as approved.
S. Identification: source earthing conductor (or neutral earthing conductor) is to be identified along its
entire length by continuous black insulation labelled ‘neutral earthing’.
2.3 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Earth Rod: copper clad steel, 1 7 mm diameter, 2.5 m length, extendible as necessary to obtain
required earth resistance. Earth rod is to be complete with couplings, head and bolted connector of
sufficient size, and number of bolted clamps to connect all cables terminated thereto.
B. Buried Earth Conductors: bare annealed copper strip conductors 25 x 2.5 mm, or annealed
stranded copper conductors 70 mm cross-section.
C. Tape Mats: where earth rods are not likely to be used, earth electrode is to consist of parallel and
perpendicular copper strip, 2.4 m apart, welded together by exothermic welds to form a grid. Tape is
to be 25 x 2.5 mm strip conductor.
D. Earth Pit: precast, square or circular section concrete hand hole (minimum 450 mm internal
diameter), with concrete cover, and extending to about 1 50 mm below top of earth rod. Earth pit is
to be provided for each earth rod where connected to an earthing conductor. Cover is to have inset
brass plate with inscription ‘Earth Pit - Do Not Remove’.
E. Earthing Conductors: insulated or bare copper conductor as described in the Specification for the
particular applications.
F. Testing Joints (Test Links): copper or copper alloy, with bolted end connections, disconnect table by
use of a tool, and suitably sized for earthing conductors or earth bar connection. Links are to be
fixed to porcelain or other approved insulting supports. Contact surfaces are to be tinned.
G. Protective Conductors: single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated cables, having rated

insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be a conductor forming part of multi-core
cable, colour coded.
H. Main Earthing Bar: hard drawn copper, 40 x 4 mm where formed into a close loop, and 50 x 6 mm
where open ended. Earth bar is to be labeled "Main Earth Bar" and is to be drilled, for connection of
conductors, at a spacing not less than 75 mm, and is to be supplied with copper alloy bolts, nuts
and washers and wall mounting insulators.
I. Protective Bonding Conductors: bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded copper cable or
flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross-sectional area as described in relevant subsections or articles
of this section or other sections of the Specification.
J. Earthing Accessories: copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design, compatible with
points of connection, and of adequate cross-section and current carrying capacity. Connectors and
clamps are to be bolted type. Bolts, nuts and washers are to be high quality phosphor bronze or
copper silicon alloys.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHING OF MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANELBOARDS, LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

AND WIRING ACCESSORIES
A. Main Earthing Bar is to be provided in main distribution room and connected to earth electrode by two
insulated conductors (minimum 120 mm via testing joints.
B. Earthing Bars Of Main Distribution Boards are to be connected, by bare earthing conductor, directly to
main earthing bar at main distribution room and by protective conductor run with incoming feeder from
respective supply point.
C. Distribution, Lighting and Power Panel boards are to be connected by protective conductors run
together with incoming feeder cable, connecting earth terminals in panel boards with respective main
distribution board earthing bar.
D. Socket Outlets are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the branch circuit and
connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to which socket outlet terminal is to be
connected.
E. Lighting Fixtures and Other Exposed Conductive Parts of electrical installations, such as switches,
heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by protective earth conductors to earthing
terminals of respective panel boards.
3.2 GENERATOR PLANT EARTHING
A. Generator Neutral (Star Point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor through the
neutral earthing link or device to main earthing bar. Neutral earthing conductor is to be suitably
sized to carry maximum earth fault current for time it takes the system protection to operate with
final conductor temperature not exceeding 1 60°. C, but not less than 30 mm per 100 KVA of
generator rating, with a minimum of 50 mm
B. Generator Earthing Terminal is to be connected to main earthing bar by bare copper conductor of
2
cross section not less than 20 mm2 per 100 KVA of generator size. with a minimum of 35 mm
C. Switchgear (ATS) And Control Gear: earthing terminals or bars of switchgear and control gear are to
be connected by bare copper earthing conductors to main earth bar in compliance with bonding
regulation.
D. Extraneous Conductive Parts including sheet frames, battery racks, day-tank, pumps and piping are

to be connected by bare copper earthing conductors to main earth bar in compliance with bonding
regulations.
3.4 MECHANICAL PLANT ROOMS AND FIXED MACHINERY
A. Main Earthing Bar or Loop is to be conveniently located in mechanical plant rooms, and connected by
earthing conductors to exposed conductive parts of motor control centre at its earthing bar, and to
motors, switches and other electrical equipment etc. at their earthing terminals, using 20 x 2 mm bare
copper strips or 35 mm bare copper conductor (minimum size) or as required to carry maximum earth
fault current for 1 second with final conductor temperature not exceeding 200°C. Conductors are to be
securely fixed, recessed in floor grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Earth bar
or loop is to be securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass saddles.
B. Main Earthing Bar Or Loop is to be connected at two extremely separate points to earth electrode,
directly through two test joints by insulated earthing conductors, or connected to main earth bar by
protective conductors.
C. Motor And Other Equipment Earth Terminals are to be connected also by protective earth conductors
of each branch circuit to earth terminal/bar at motor control centre, panel or distribution unit.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Continuity: ensure that complete earthing system is electrically continuous and mechanically secure.
B. Earth Rods: while siting earth rods, ensure that resistance areas associated with individual rods do
not overlap. Earth rods are to be located at a distance greater than 600 mm from foundations of
buildings. Where rock is encountered, a hole of sufficient size is to be drilled before lowering the
rod. Conductive filler such as Marconite or Bentonite or equal filler that will not corrode, is to be
provided around the rod.
C. Buried Earthing Conductors are to be laid at a depth not less than 0.8 m from ground surface.
D. Earthing Conductors are to follow shortest path between earth rods and main earthing terminals or
bars, and are to run in PVC conduit (duct) fastened to building structure by approved supports and
extending 0.2 m above level, and are to be protected against mechanical damage and corrosion.
E. Protective Conductors: separate protective conductors, which are not part of a cable, are to be fixed
on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit conductors.
F. Protective Bonding: remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar coating at threads, contact
points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made by fittings designed to make secure bonds.
G. Protection Against Corrosion protect bolted connections against corrosion either by filling with
vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and proper capping.
H. Connections: earth connections are to be readily accessible. If inaccessible earth connection is

permitted, approved exothermic welding or brazing technique is to be employed.
I. Connections: where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made. Use bimetallic
fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous paint or compound, or by wrapping
with protective tape to exclude moisture.
3.6 TEST ON SITE AND RECORDS
A. Combined Resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and checked against
specified resistance.

B. Electrical Continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and supplementary
equipotential conductors is to be checked.
C. Earth Fault Loop Impedance of all circuits is to be measured and checked against calculated
impedance figures.
D. Operation of residual current protective devices is to be checked.

E. Records: submit the following:
1. Scaled drawings, as-installed, showing actual layout and specification of all components of
earthing system
2. Nature of soil and any special earth arrangements etc.
3. Date and particulars of soil conditioning method and agents if used
4. Test conditions and results obtained

1706 - BF HOTEL - Specs - Structural

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1706 - BF HOTEL - Specs - Structural

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1706 - BF HOTEL - Specs - Structural

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BF HOTEL

Makkah, Saudi Arabia

(Civil/ Structural Works)

STRUCTURAL/ CIVIL WORKS

SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING

SECTION 02260 – EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

SECTION 02300 – EARTHWORK

SECTION 02361 – TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 03000 – CONCRETE WORK

SECTION 03331 – CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

SECTION 03490 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE

SECTION 03400 – PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURE

SECTION 04810 – UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 05120 – STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 07135 – EPDM WATERPROOFING

SECTION 07210 – BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION 07920 – JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS

SECTION 16452 – EARTHING

A. This Section includes the following:

1.2 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING 1/3

B. Protect existing site improvements from damage during construction.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING 2/3

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

END OF SECTION 02230

MHA-TECH. SPECIFICATIONS- 1706- 04/02/2015 SECTION 02230 – SITE CLEARING 3/3

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

4. Pre-cast Concrete Piling.

3.2 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS

END OF SECTION 02260

A. This Section includes the following:

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below sub-grade elevations or beyond indicated

C. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 02300 – EARTHWORK 1/5

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 02300 – EARTHWORK 2/5

B. Excavation of unclassified materials.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

3.8 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on sub grades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

MHA – TECH. SPECIFICATION – 1706 – 04/02/2015 SECTION 02300 – EARTHWORK 3/5